Home

&Scaron;KODA Rapid Owner`s Manual

1. Size class of P l the child seat Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle 0 up to 10 kg E X IL SU X E D X IL SU X up to 13 kg L gt Transporting children safely 145 Parl ret Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle IL SU IUF a The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat b If the front passenger seat is fitted with the ISOFIX system attachment points it is suited for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the Semi Universal approval IL SU The seat is suited for installation of an ISOFIX child seat with Semi Universal approval The Semi Universal category means that the child p ARE seat with the ISOFIX system is approved for your vehicle Observe the list a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat of vehicles that comes with the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with a Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the Universal approval and attachment with the TOP TETHER belt locking eyes X The seat is not fitted with fixing eyes for the ISOFIX system Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye Onno account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other an chorage points Anchor eyelets for the TO
2. Central control unit Electrical auxiliary heating system CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Bulb arrangement inthe headlights _ CCC Replacing the low beam bulb 201 Replacing bulb for main beam daytime running lights and parking light 202 Changing the front turn signal bulb gt 202 Replacing the bulb for the fog light 203 Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 203 Rear light Rapid _ 204 Replacing bulbs in rear light Rapid 204 Tail lamp Rapid Spaceback 205 Replacing bulbs in rear light Rapid Spaceback 206 Some manual skills are required to change a bulb For this reason we recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties gt Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb gt Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs The designa tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb gt A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot EI WARNING a Always read and observe the warning notes before completing any work in the engine compartment page 162 Engine compartment Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be s
3. Fig 166 Schematic representation of the fuse box for vehicles with left hand steering right hand steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 197 No Power consumer S contact START STOP Instrument cluster headlight range adjustment telephone oil level sensor diagnostic port Control unit for ABS ESC steering angle sensor strip with switches Petrol engine Speed regulating system Reversing light manual gearbox Ignition engine control unit automatic gearbox COONS DM Uy A W N Brake pedal switch clutch switch engine cooling fan Operating controls for the heating electronic control unit for air condi 9 tioning system park distance control window lift engine cooling fan heated washer nozzles 10 DC DC converter 11 Mirror adjustment 198 Do it yourself No Power consumer 12 Control unit for trailer detection 13 Electronic control unit for automatic gearbox selector lever of the au tomatic gearbox 14 Headlight beam control 15 Not assigned 16 Power steering speed sensor engine control unit control unit for fuel pump 17 Daytime running lights radio for vehicles with START STOP 18 Mirror heater 19 Ignition lock input 20 Engine control unit electronic control unit for fuel pump fuel pump 3 Reversing
4. Lights and visibility 49 EI WARNING a Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice snow mist or other objects Convex curved outward or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of vi sion They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These mir rors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following vehicles a Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles EH Note The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on a f the electrical exterior mirror setting fails at any time the mirrors can be adjus ted by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface Contact a specialist garage if there is a fault with the power setting function for the exterior mirrors Interior mirror Fig 33 Interior mirror BNH 0280 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 49 Dimming mirror gt Adjust the lever at the lower edge of the mirror in the direction of the arrow A Fig 33 The mirror dips 50 Using the system Basic setting gt Adjust the lever at the lower edge of the mirror in the direction of the arrow Fig 33 Exterior mirror BNH 0241 Fig 34 Front door rotary knob for the exterior mirrors mechanical electri cal First read
5. Switching to manual shifting gt Push the gear selector from position D towards the right or left in a right hand drive vehicle Shifting up gears gt Push the selector lever forwards Fig 95 Shifting down gears gt Push the selector lever backwards Fig 95 When accelerating the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If a lower gear is selected the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving Note It may be beneficial for example when travelling downhill to use manual shifting of gears Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence the wear on the brakes page 100 Information on braking Starting off and driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 101 Starting off gt Start the engine gt Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal gt Press and hold the lock button Fig 94 on page 102 gt Move the selector lever into the desired position page 102 and then release the lock button gt Release the brake pedal and accelerate Stop gt Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a short time such as at a cross roads Parking gt Depress the brake peda
6. gt Grasp the variable loading floor at handle A Fig 69 gt Lift the variable loading floor in the direction of arrow 1 and move partially backwards in the direction of arrow 2 gt Lift the variable loading floor at the front place onto corner C and slide in the direction of arrow 3 until it clicks into place in brackets B gt Place the variable loading floor in the direction of the arrow 4 Fig 70 gt CAUTION When setting the variable loading floor to the upper position the luggage com partment cover must not be in the parking position page 68 i Note When in the upper position Fig 70 B there is space for storing items under neath the variable loading floor Seats and useful equipment 71 Setting in the lower position BNH 02 Fig 72 Set variable loading floor to the lower position variable loading floor in the lower position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 70 The variable loading floor in the upper position can be set to the lower position as follows gt Grasp the variable loading floor at handle A Fig 71 gt Lift the variable loading floor in the direction of arrow 1 and partially move in the direction of arrow 2 until it detaches from brackets B gt Place the variable loading floor onto the floor covering of the luggage compart ment while tilted forward gt
7. The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is switched on page 14 Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory fitted towing device or a towing device from SKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer 1 If both switch on conditions are conflicting for example if the front wheels are turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority 44 Using the system Hazard warning light system Fig 24 Button for hazard warning light system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Switching on off gt Press the button A Fig 24 All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The warning light for the turn signals and the warning light in the button also flash at the same time The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off If one of the airbags is deployed the hazard warning light system will switch on automatically If the turn signal light is switched on when the hazard warning light and the igni tion are both switched on then only the turn signal light on the corresponding vehicle side will flash E WARNING Switch on the hazard warning light system if for example the following oc curs a You encounter a traffic
8. system a As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always indi cated again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Handbrake Brake system A Seat belt warning light Generator amp Open door 7 Engine Oil amp Coolant Power steering amp Electronic Stability Control ESC ic Traction Control System ASR Antilock brake system ABS Rear fog light Bulb failure 14 Using the system 14 15 15 15 15 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 Exhaust inspection system w Glow plug system diesel engine EPC Engine performance check petrol engine Diesel particle filter diesel engine D Fuel reserve r Airbag system U Tyre inflation pressure Windscreen washer fluid level Turn signal system 0 Fog lights Cruise control system Selector lever lock D Main beam The indicator lights show the current status of certain functions faults and may be accompanied by audible signals F WARNING a Ignoring illuminated indicator lights and related messages or instructions in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicl
9. Compartments 56 Computer See multifunction display 25 Coolant 168 Checking 169 Indicator light 16 Information messages 16 Replenishing 170 Temperature gauge T CORNER See Fog lights with CORNER function 43 Correct seated position 127 Driver 128 Front passenger 128 Instructions 129 Rear seats 128 Counter for distance driven 12 Cruise control system Activating deactivating 115 Changing the stored speed 115 Indicator light 21 Storing and maintaining speed 115 Switching off temporarily 115 Cruise Control System 114 Cup holders 58 D DAY LIGHT See Daytime running lights 42 Daytime running lights 42 Deactivating an airbag 140 Decorative films 155 Defrsoting rear window 47 Delayed locking of the boot lid see Boot lid 38 Diesel refer to Fuel 162 Diesel fuel Operation in winter 162 Index 213 Diesel particle filter 19 Information messages 19 Digital clock Dipstick Disconnecting and reconnecting vehicle battery Display Compass points Coolant temperature Correct gear changes Fuel supply Service intervals Display of the second speed 13 167 Distance driven Door Child safety lock Closing Indicator light for an open door Opening Door locking Emergency Doors Emergency locking Double sided floor covering Driving Abroad Driving through water on streets Emissions Fuel consumption Maximum speed Driving economically Economical gear
10. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on each side of the vehicle to illu minate the area around the vehicle when turning parking etc Lights and visibility 43 The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions are met v The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to the right or left The engine is running The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km h The low beam is switched on The daytime running lights are not switched on The fog lights are not switched on SAK KK The CORNER light is mainly intended to be used for illuminating the nearby envi ronment at a broad angle in front of and beside the vehicle It lights up and goes out gradually Note The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear Rear fog light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Switching on off gt Turn the light switch to position 20 or 2 Fig 23 on page 43 gt Pull the light switch to position 2 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights page 43 the rear fog light is switched on by turning the light switch to the position 20 and is pulled out directly to the position 2 This switch can only be put into one position
11. Tighten the anti theft wheel bolt last page 185 gt Replace the wheel trim or the caps i Note a All bolts must be clean and must turn easily a Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts a When fitting unidirectional tyres ensure that the direction of rotation is cor rect page 178 Follow up work First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 184 The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel 1 Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti theft wheel bolts page 186 gt Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special bolt page 179 Spare wheel gt Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band gt Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible gt Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible gt Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair options Note a If it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing the wheel the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque a Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked Loosening tightening wheel bolts TOMS Changing a wheel Loosening the wheel bolts First read and observe the introductory information
12. gt Lock the handwheel lock by turning the key B right as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow 1 the arrow on the key points towards the closed pad lock icon gt Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Fit the cap C on the handwheel lock in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 108 gt Check that the tow bar is securely attached page 121 EJ warnine a Do not hold the handwheel with your hand when attaching the ball bar there is a risk of finger injury a After fitting the tow bar always secure the lock and remove the key a The tow bar must not be operated with the key inserted a f the tow bar is not in the ready position it cannot be fitted in the mounting recess CAUTION After removing the key always replace the cover on the handwheel lock risk of lock getting dirty a rt t B i Tt 2a Note Store the cover of the mounting recess in a suitable place in the luggage com partment store after removal Check proper fitting Fig 109 Check that the tow bar is attach ed properly BNH 0159 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 Check that the tow bar is fitted properly before each use Check the following points V The green marking A Fig 109 on the handwheel points to the white mark ing on the tow bar The handwheel lies flush with the tow bar there is no gap Towing a trailer 121 J T
13. gt next to the icon H within the fuel gauge displays the installation location of the fuel filler on the right hand side of the vehicle Counter for distance driven Fig 6 pala trip ic Pa Tis A Segment display MAXI DOT dis ANNT play ILLL km trip J6 BNH 0172 krri b33 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 Daily trip counter trip The daily trip counter A Fig 6 indicates the distance driven since the counter was last reset in intervals of 100 metres or 1 10 of a mile Reset daily trip counter gt Press and hold the 6 Fig 2 on page 10 button Odometer The odometer B Fig 6 displays the total distance the vehicle has travelled Note If the second speed display is enabled on vehicles with a segment display this speed will be shown instead of the odometer Digital clock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 The clock is set using the buttons 5 and 6 Fig 2 on page 10 Select the display that you wish to change with the button 5 and carry out the change with the button 6 In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display it is also possible to set the clock in the Time menu page 28 Display of the second speed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 The display can show the current speed in mph This feature is provid
14. mum protection The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis must not be positioned across the stomach and must always fit snugly Fig 117 g Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt This is the only way of en suring optimal protection for the unborn child With pregnant women the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as pos sible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen Fig 117 D Release Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary gt Press the red button in the belt buckle Fig 116 B the lock tongue pops out gt Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing the seat belt does not twist l CAUTION When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not damage the door trim or other parts of the interior Belt height adjustment on the front seats J Fig 118 Front seat Seat belt height ad juster BNH 0012 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 130 The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size gt Press the seat belt height adjuster and move up or
15. page 28 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Using the information system 22 gt Auto Check Control page 13 Ice warning 23 gt Selector lever positions for an automatic gearbox page 102 Gear recommendation 24 Door boot or engine compartment warning 24 m WARNING Compass point display 24 Concentrate fully on your driving at all times As the driver you are fully re The information system provides the driver with alerts and messages about in sponsible for the operation of your vehicle E dividual vehicle systems This information and advice is shown in the instrument cluster display or indicated by the illumination of the corresponding indicator light in the instrument cluster First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 Some functions of the information system can be operated using the buttons on the operating lever Fig 7 or on the multifunction steering wheel Fig 7 gt B3T 0667 Fig 7 Buttons adjustment wheel on the operating lever on the multifunc tion steering wheel 22 Using the system Description of the operation Button adjust ment Operation Action wheel Fig 7 Select data Briefly push up or down Set data values Briefly push up or down Open main menu in the MAXI DOT display Press and hold button Show data Press briefly Confirm data Press briefly Open main menu in the MAXI DOT display Press and
16. A Fig 41 on the corresponding side of the vehicle safety position gt Press the locking button B and completely fold the back seat rest forward in the direction of the arrow Seats and useful equipment 55 Folding backwards gt If you removed the head restraint you need to reinsert it with the backrest til ted slightly forwards gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the locking but ton B clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest M gt Make sure that the red pin C is hidden E WARNING The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat backrests they must be ready to use The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on sud den braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged Only then can the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function CAUTION Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backrests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Car park ticket holder Storage compartments in the doors Holder for reflective vest Storage compartments in centre console Cup holders Cigarette lighter Ashtray 12 v
17. Cleaning 159 fastening and unfastening 132 Height adjustment 133 Inertia reels 133 The physical principle of a frontal collision 131 Seat features 54 Seats folding forward 55 Front armrest 55 Head restraints 53 Heating 54 Rear armrest 55 Seats and useful equipment 52 Adjusting the seats 52 see automatic gearbox Manual shifting of gears on the multifunction steering wheel gt 103 Selector lever see Using the selector lever 102 Selector lever lock Indicator light 21 Service 150 Service interval display CSB Service intervals 147 Setting Lower position of the variable loading floor _____ 72 Upper position of the variable loading floor 71 Setting the clock Clock 13 Shelves 56 Shifting gears Driving and saving energy 106 Index 217 Side airbag 138 Snow chains _ Cd Spare wheel 179 Speedometer 1 See speedometer 1 Speed symbol See Wheels gt T8 Spoiler 151 START STOP T16 Manually activating deactivating the system 117 Operating conditions of the system 117 Starting shutting down the engine 116 Starting and stopping the engine with the key __ 97 Starting engine Jump starting 189 Starting the engine Jump starting 190 Key 98 START STOP Information messages Y Y T8 Jump starting SST Steering force assistance 97 Steering wheel 96 Storage compartment in centre console _ _ 5
18. Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot Defective selector lever lock If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted e g dis charged vehicle battery faulty fuse the selector lever can no longer be moved out of position P in the normal manner and the vehicle can no longer be driven The selector lever must be emergency released page 195 104 Driving i Note If the gearbox has switched to the emergency programme visit a specialist ga rage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects New engine 104 New tyres 105 New brake pads 105 New engine Coy First read and observe the introductory information given on page 104 The engine has to be run in during the first 1500 kilometres Up to 1000 kilometres gt Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use i e 3 4 of the maximum permissible engine speed gt No full throttle gt Avoid high engine speeds gt Do not tow a trailer From 1000 up to 1 500 kilometres Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the gear engaged i e up to the maximum permissible engine speed The red scale of the rev counter indicates the range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving styl
19. Correct seated position a If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident EJ warnine Observe the following instructions for handling the airbag system a If there is a fault the airbag system must be checked by a specialist garage immediately Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident a No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system a Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork a It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci dent The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de ployed System description First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 135 The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light 2 in the instrument cluster page 20 When the airbags are deployed they fill with gas and inflate A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when the
20. ESC Fig 100 ESC system TCS button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 111 The ESC system helps improve control of the vehicle in situations where it is be ing operated at its dynamic limits such as a sudden change to the direction of travel Depending on the conditions of the road surface the risk of skidding is re duced thereby improving the vehicle s driving stability The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle In the event of deviations such as the car beginning to skid the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate wheel During an intervention of the system the warning light flashes in the instru ment cluster The following systems are integrated into the Electronic Stability Control ESC gt Antilock Brake System ABS page 112 gt Traction control ASR page 112 gt Electronic Differential Lock EDL page 112 gt Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA page 112 gt Hill Hold Control HHC page 112 The ESC system cannot be deactivated The Fig 100 symbol button can only be used to deactivate the ASR ea The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster when the ASR is deactiva ted Assist sys
21. FI warnine The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury CAUTION A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle e g damage to gearbox or points out general risks of an accident SA For the sake of the environment An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects This is where you will for example find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump tion i Note A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the operation of your vehicle Date of delivery first registration VIN I Vehicle identification number PLETE EET T TT ET SKODA Partner Stamp and signature of the vendor confirm that have taken delivery of the specified vehicle in good condi tion have received information on how to operate it correctly and have had the terms of the warranty explained to me Signature of the customer 3 whichever comes first SKODA extended warranty Stamp of SKODA Partner Limitations of the KODA extended warranty Years Valid from 2 whichever comes first You have opted for a SKODA our sincere thanks for your confidence in us You have received a vehicle with the latest technology and range of amenities Please read
22. The cover must engage securely CAUTION a Ensure that the cable bundle does not become pinched between the body and the lamp when it is being refitted risk of damage to the electric installation and risk of water ingress a If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched we recom mend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage a Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when re moving and installing the tail lamp Replacing bulbs in rear light Rapid Fig 179 Outer part of the lamp inner part of the lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Outer part of the lamp gt Turn the bulb holder 1 Fig 179 in an anti clockwise direction and remove it from the lamp housing gt Replace the bulb reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn to the stop in a clockwise direction Inner part of the lamp gt Unlock the bulb holder using the locking latches marked with arrows Fig 179 A and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp gt Turn the bulb holder to the stop Fig 179 Blin an anti clockwise direction and remove it from the lamp housing gt Replace the bulb reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn to the stop in a clockwise direction gt Insert the bulb holder in the tail lamp assembly All locking mechanis
23. The flexible storage compartment can be installed on the right hand side of the boot Fig 67 Installing gt Place both ends of the storage compartment into the openings on the right side panel of the luggage compartment gt Push the storage compartment down to lock it Removing gt Grasp the storage compartment on the two upper corners gt Remove the storage compartment by pulling upwards and then towards you CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects with a maximum total weight of 8 kg Seats and useful equipment 69 i Note The flexible storage compartment cannot be installed on vehicles with the varia ble loading floor page 70 Meshed pocket for storage Rapid Spaceback Fig 68 Meshed pocket for storage Ih BNH 0197 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 The meshed pocket for storage is located on the right hand side of the boot Fig 68 CAUTION The meshed pocket for storage is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 5 kg in weight in total Double sided floor covering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 You can fit a double sided floor covering in the luggage compartment One side of the double sided floor covering is made of fabric the other side is washable easy to maintain The washable side is used to transport wet or dirty items
24. Vehicle identification data 207 Dimensions 208 Vehicle specific details per engine type 209 Multi purpose vehicles AF AT The details given in the vehicle s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual The listed performance values were determined without performance reducing equipment e g air conditioning system Vehicle identification data RRCRRRAR BAKKE KX xxxxxx KA x KARXKKRK RA BAA EET RAN KRR HARA AA peakate Waua esol ad RARA RAR ASTOR 1D0 SSJ SRQ 1KD EF 1AT 3FA 1N3 INL HH7 4UF 4R4 B03 3AN 4X3 KH6 BRM 4A0 BZA JIL QI BGU 790 18D 8AL 8X0 4K3 B03 7MJ QMO 3L3 9PS GIA 7X0 92V BWA if 7AA GOI LOL 7P4 FOA Fig 183 Vehicle data sticker type plate Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 207 Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker Fig 183 A is located underneath the floor covering in the boot The vehicle data sticker contains the following data 1 Vehicle identification number VIN 2 Vehicle type 3 Gearbox code paint number interior equipment engine output engine code 4 Partial vehicle description 5 Operating weight in kg 6 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km intra urban extra urban combined CO emission levels combined in g km The indicated positions 5 6 and 7 on the vehicle data sticker are only valid for some countries Type plate The type plate Fig 183 B is loca
25. battery fire and acid splashes a Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the engine the ignition and all electrical components and disconnect the negative termi nal on the battery CAUTION Improper handling of the battery can lead to damage We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage CAUTION a The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off otherwise the vehicle s electrical system electronic components can be dam aged When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system first of all dis connect the negative terminal of the battery followed by the positive terminal a When connecting the battery to the electrical system first of all connect the positive terminal of the battery followed by the negative terminal Under no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly risk of a cable fire 172 General Maintenance a Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork risk of damage to the paintwork a Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle battery housing from the effects of ultra violet light a f the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks the battery will discharge This is because certa
26. interior temperature However the blower level can be manually adjusted to suit your particular needs gt Turn the control dial 10 Fig 80 on page 82 to the left or to the right to in crease or decrease the blower speed If the blower is switched off the Climatronic system is switched off The set blower speed is shown by displaying the corresponding number of seg ments in icon 9 in the display 84 Using the system EI warnine a Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases a Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary a Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up Defrosting windscreen AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 82 Switching on off gt Press the symbol button max Fig 80 on page 82 The symbol max pos 5 Fig 80 on page 82 appears in the display gt Press the symbol button maxq again or press the AUTO button The maxq symbol in the display goes out More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 and 2 Fig 77 on page 76 The temper ature control is controlled automatically CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Introductory information 85 Phone Phonebook 86 Control telephone from the multifunction steering wheel Versio
27. the specified tests directly if required by the customer if they are authorised to do so This saves you time and money Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for prior checking in preparation of a legally required test we recommend that you consult the service consultant of your SKODA Service Partner beforehand Based on their appraisal the service consultant will tell you which areas you should focus on in order to ensure that your vehicle will pass the technical test without any problems This allows you to avoid additional expenses resulting from a possible subsequent test SKODA Service Partners First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 SKODA Service Partners feature modern specially developed tools and equip ment Here trained specialists have access to a comprehensive range of SKODA Original Parts and SKODA Original Accessories for carrying out modifications re pairs and technical alterations All SKODA service partners operate according to the most recent guidelines and instructions from KODA AUTO a s All service and repair work is therefore carried out on time and at the appropriate quality Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good techni cal condition 150 General Maintenance SKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle and to prov
28. 1 4 90 kW TSI 1635 1680 1690 1735 630 1 6 1 66 kW TDI CR 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR 1725 1770 1745 1790 17239 1 6 1 77kW MPI 1615 1660 a 1655 1700 meen Technical data 211 A Abroad Driving abroad 110 Unleaded petrol 110 ABS Function 112 Warning light 18 Accessories 149 Adjusting Belt height 133 Exterior mirror 50 Head restraints 53 Interior mirror 50 Manual air conditioning 81 Seat 53 Seats 52 Steering wheel 96 Adjusting the seats 52 127 Adjustment Beam range 41 Aerial 153 Airbag 135 Deactivating 140 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 140 Deployment 135 Front airbag 137 Head airbag 139 Indicator light 20 Modifications and damage to the airbag system _ 151 Side airbag 138 135 Airbag system Air conditioning system Air outlets Climatronic Manual air conditioning system Air outlets 76 82 79 76 212 Index Alarm Switching off 36 Triggering 36 Anti theft alarm system Activating deactivating 36 Trailer 125 Antilock Braking System 112 Armrest Front 55 Rear 53 Artificial leather 158 Ashtray 59 ASR warning light 17 Assist system ABS 112 Assist systems 111 ABS 18 ASR 17 Cruise Control System 114 EDL 112 ESC 17 111 HBA 112 HHC 112 Parking aid 113 START STOP 116 TES 112 Auto Check Control 13 Automati
29. 61 N N1 65 Nets 66 O Oil Information messages 16 See Engine oil On board computer See multifunction display 167 25 Operation in winter De icing windows Diesel fuel Vehicle battery Outside temperature Overview Engine compartment Indicator lights 155 162 173 26 165 14 p Paintwork See Paintwork care Paintwork care Panoramic roof Parking Parking aid Parking aid Function Parking light Part replacement Passive safety Before setting off Driving safety Safety equipment Passive Safety Pedals Footmats Petrol refer to Fuel Polishing the paintwork See Taking care of your vehicle 154 154 48 113 113 113 4 149 126 127 126 126 101 101 161 154 Power outlet 12 V 60 Power steering gt gt gt 9g Indicator ligt _ CS Practical features 56 Meshed pockets on the front seat backrests ____ 64 Storage compartment in centre console __ 58 Storage compartment on the passenger side ____ 63 Storage pockets on the front seats 64 Waste container 60 R Radiator fan 165 Raise vehicle 186 Rear fog light 44 Indicator light 18 Rear interior light 46 Rear mirror 49 Exterior mirror 50 Interior mirror 50 recirculated air mode Climatronic 83 Recirculated air mode Manual air conditioning 81 Refuell
30. B gt Support the base plate of the lifting jack with its entire surface resting on level ground and ensure that the lever is positioned vertically to the point at which the claw grasps the web Fig 152 A gt Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground EI warnine a Only raise the vehicle at the attachment points Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle Securing wheels against theft Fig 153 Principle sketch Anti theft wheel bolt with adapter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 184 The anti theft wheel bolts can only be removed tightened with the aid of the adapter page 183 gt Remove the cover from the anti theft wheel bolt gt Insert the adapter B Fig 153 with its toothed side fully into the inner tooth ing of the anti theft wheel bolt A until the stop so that only the outer hexagon is jutting out gt Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop gt Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt page 185 gt After removing the adapter replace the cap on the anti theft wheel bolt gt Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible hig Note a Make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the anti theft wheel bolt This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from
31. Communication and multimedia 87 Button adjust ment Action wheel Fig 82 Turn upwards Operation Increase the volume Turn downwards Decrease volume a Valid for vehicles with the Amundsen t navigation system b Valid for vehicles without the Amundsen navigation system Symbols in the display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The following symbols are displayed in the Maxi DOT display Meaning E Charge status of the phone battery Signal strength a phone is connected to the hands free system The hands free system is visible to other devices A multimedia unit is connected to the hands free system a This function is only supported by some mobile phones Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system the two devices must be paired Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone 4 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsent navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN SSP is either displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be entere
32. Fig 114 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy energy of motion to a considerable ex tent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well result in severe injuries Occupants of a vehicle who have correctly fastened their seat belts have the ma jor benefit of the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed as effectively as possi ble by the belts The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures such as the airbag system also contribute to the kinetic energy being reduced as effectively as possible The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury 130 Safety Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the ve hicle page 142 Transporting children safely EI WARNING a Fasten your seat belt before each journey even when driving in town This also applies to the passengers seated at the rear risk of injury a Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 132 Fastening and unfastening seat belts a Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seat ed page 127 Correct seated position The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness EI WARNING Observe the following instructions for the correct routing of the seat belt a Al
33. Fig 12 Locking gt Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the opposite direction of travel locking position B Fig 12 If the driver s door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked Unlocking locking with the remote control TOMS Remote control key AA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 31 Explanation of graphic Fig 13 Unlocking the vehicle Locking the vehicle Unlocking the boot lid Folding out folding up of the key bit Warning light BA Te Unlocking The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un locked If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safelock system or anti theft alarm system will be switched on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally Locking The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been locked If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed Checking the battery condition If the red indicator light B Fig 13 does not flash when you press a button on the remote control key the battery is empty Replace the battery page 193 CAUTION a Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and
34. Fig 84 on the multifunction steering wheel Communication and multimedia 91 a The dialogue is immediately terminated in the event of an incoming call a The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction steering wheel with telephone control Voice commands Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 90 Basic voice commands Voice command Action After this command the system repeats all possible HELP commands This command calls up the contact from the phone book After this command for example the phone book can be repeated back to you a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc CALL XYZ PHONE BOOK CALL HISTORY Lists of dialled numbers missed calls etc After this command a telephone number can be en tered to establish a connection with the requested party After this command the system calls the last dialled number DIAL NUMBER REDIAL Play music from the mobile phone or another paired MUSIC device After this command the system offers additional FURTHER OPTIONS context dependent commands SETTINGS CANCEL Selection for setting Bluetooth dialogue etc The dialogue is ended 4 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsent navigation system If a voi
35. First read and observe the introductory information given on page 147 The service interval specified by the manufacturer is indicated on the vehicle data sticker Fig 129 under the floor covering in the boot One of the following service intervals applies for your vehicle gt Fixed service interval QIT gt Fixed service interval Ql2 gt Fixed service interval QI3 gt Fixed service interval QI4 gt Variable service interval QI6 Vehicle care 147 In order to operate a vehicle with a variable service interval it must only be fil led and topped up with the prescribed engine oil If this engine oil is not available the oil change is subject to a fixed service inter val In this case the vehicle must be changed to the fixed service interval Note a The corresponding motor oil specifications page 167 a A specialist garage can perform the changeover from the variable service inter val to the fixed service interval or from the fixed service interval to the variable service interval Fixed service intervals QI1 QI4 AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 147 After the first 30 000 km or 2 years then every 30 000 km or every 1 year Inspection 11 QI4 p MER Every 15 000 km or every 1 year applies to Rus sia Qn Every 5000 km or every 1 year Ql2 Every 7500 km or every 1 year Every 10 000 km or every 1 year Oil change service Every 15 0
36. Rapid Spaceback Slide the dismantled cover between bolt B and contact sur face C of the side panel E WARNING a The luggage compartment cover in the parking position restricts the driv er s view at the back a When adjusting the parking position the boot cover must be between the bolt B Fig 64 and the rear seat backrest risk of damaging the rear seat backrest and the boot cover 1 Applies to Rapid 2 Applies to Rapid Spaceback 68 Using the system Storage compartments in the boot Fig 65 Remove storage compartment cover Rapid monn Donny PS Fig 66 Remove storage compartment cover Rapid Spaceback left right First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 The side compartment covers can be removed to increase the size of the luggage compartment Removing Inserting gt Grasp the top part of the cover and remove it in the direction of the ar row Fig 65 or Fig 66 Insertion takes place in reverse order CAUTION The storage compartments are designed for storing small objects of up to 1 5 kg in weight in total a When using the storage compartment take care not to damage the storage compartment or the luggage compartment lining Flexible storage compartment Rapid Spaceback HOSSA Flexible storage compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64
37. Spoiler SSS 7 Airbags 151 The instructions and guidelines from KODA AUTO a s must be observed when carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition After carrying out modifications repairs or technical alterations the vehicle will comply with German road trans port regulations StVZO Always consult a KODA Partner page 150 before buying accessories or parts or before carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle EJ wAaRNING a f work on your vehicle is not carried out properly this can lead to operation al faults risk of accident and serious injuries a We recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations carried out by a specialist garage a Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational faults This interference can also impair not directly affected sys tems because of the networking of the electronic components The operation al safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to increased wear of parts a The KODA Partner accepts no liability for products that have not been ap proved by KODA AUTO a s even though these may be products with an op erational approval or that have been approved by a government testing insti tute EJ w
38. Under adverse conditions this may cause objects or people to not be recognised by the system CAUTION a If a continuous tone sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car this indicates a system fault Have the fault rectified by a specialist garage a The sensors must be kept clean free of ice etc to enable the system to oper ate properly a The system function may be limited under adverse weather conditions heavy rain water vapour very low or high temperatures etc a Additionally installed modules such as bicycle carriers can impair the function of the parking aid Function Fig 101 Range of sensors First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 113 The parking aid hereafter referred to solely as system only works when the igni tion is switched on The system supports the driver via audible signals and the display on the radio or the factory installed navigation system when parking and manoeuvring Radio user guide Navigation system user guide The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the bumper and an obstacle The ultrasonic sensors are integrated in the rear bumper Explanation of graphic range of sensors in the vicinity of the vehicle Range Fig 101 Range of sensors A 160 cm 60 cm a These are only the approximate ranges of sensors The interval b
39. a f you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched we recom mend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage a Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when re moving and installing the tail lamp Fuses and light bulbs 205 Replacing bulbs in rear light Rapid Spaceback Fig 182 Outer part of the lamp inner part of the lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Outer part of the lamp gt Turn the bulb holder 1 Fig 182 in an anti clockwise direction and remove it from the lamp housing gt Replace the bulb reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn to the stop in a clockwise direction Inner part of the lamp gt Unlock the bulb holder using the locking latches marked with arrows Fig 182 A and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp gt Turn the bulb holder to the stop Fig 182 Blin an anti clockwise direction and remove it from the lamp housing gt Replace the bulb reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn to the stop in a clockwise direction gt Insert guide mandrels 3 Fig 182 of the bulb holder into the lamp All locking mechanisms must audibly snap into place 206 Do it yourself Technical data CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects
40. accident a The clutch pedal must be actuated when braking on a vehicle with manual transmission when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs Otherwise the func tion of the brake booster may be impaired risk of accident Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The children might for ex ample release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear The vehicle could then start to move risk of accident FI warnine In the event of damage occurring to the standard fitted front spoiler or the retrofitting of another front spoiler wheel hubs etc page 149 Service work adjustments and technical alterations It must be ensured that the air supply to the front brakes is not impaired The front brakes may overheat which can have a negative impact on the functioning of the braking system risk of acci dent CAUTION a Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads page 105 a Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not neces sary This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear Starting off and Driving 99 Information on braking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 99 If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system consid ers the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic the brake light flashes automatically After the speed was r
41. airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment the airbag system consists of the following modules gt Electronic control unit gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger page 137 gt Side airbags page 138 gt Head airbags page 139 gt Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster page 20 gt Key switch for the front passenger airbag page 140 gt Warning light for the front passenger airbag deactivation activation in the mid dle of the dash panel page 140 it Note The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life a f you sell your vehicle provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner Please note that the information relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag must be included a When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to com ply with the national legal requirements Airbag deployment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 135 The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer additional protection in the event of an accident The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on Airbagsystem 135 In certain accident situations the several airbags may be deployed simultaneous ly The airbags a
42. and observe the introductory information given on page 92 The multifunction steering wheel features buttons for operating the basic func tions for the factory fitted radio and navigation system Fig 86 Button adjust ment Action Radio traffic information CD MP3 Navigation wheel Fig 86 sane Press and hold button Turn upwards Increase the volume Switch the unit on off 94 Using the system Button adjust ment Action wheel Fig 86 Turn downwards Radio traffic information CD MP3 Navigation Reduce the volume Press briefly Switch to the next saved radio station Interruption of the traffic report Changing to the next title Press and hold button Search forwards Fast forward Press briefly Switch to the previous saved radio station Interruption of the traffic report Changing to the previous title Press and hold button The functions of button 1 Fig 86 are different for vehicles fitted with a univer sal telephone installation GSM II page 87 AUX and MDI inputs BNH 0243 Fig 87 AUX input MDI input Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 92 Depending on the equipment your vehicle may have AUX or MDI inputs AUX and USB for connecting external audio sources The connected external audio sources e g iPod or MP3 player can then be used for audio playback on your factory installed radio or
43. automatically and the safe securing system or anti theft alarm system will be switched back on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally Deactivating The alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is unlocked If the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds the alarm system is automatically activa ted again gid Note If the vehicle is unlocked by inserting the key into the driver door the key must be inserted into the ignition lock and the ignition switched on within 15 seconds of unlocking the door to deactivate the alarm system Interior monitor and towing protection Fig 17 Button for interior monitor and towing protection BNH 0136 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 36 The interior monitor detects movements inside the car or the inclination of the vehicle and then triggers the alarm Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the driver door gt Press the symbol button amp Fig 17 on the B column on the driver s side The symbol lighting in the button changes from red to orange gt Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically after the vehicle is locked Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibility of the alarm being triggered by movement e g children or animals from within the vehic
44. be attached to the seat using the seat belt There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seats for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place The points are marked with labels with the ISOFIX logo Fig 127 Fastening systems CoO First read and observe the introductory information given on page 145 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Anchor eyelets for the ISOFIX system 45 WARNING Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system 145 Anchor eyelets for the TOP TETHER system 146 Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system Never attach other child seats belts or objects to the anchor eyelets inten Anchor eyelets forthe ISOFIX system ded for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system risk to life Fig 127 FF Note Labels on the ISOFIX system A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit ted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve hicle Further information is available from a SKODA Partner a Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from KODA Original Ac cessories a __ BNH 0014 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 145 Overview of the usability of child seats with the ISOFIX system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard
45. button BNH 0085 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 31 If the vehicle was not locked from the outside you can also unlock or lock it with the button Fig 14 even without the ignition being switched on While a door is opened the vehicle cannot be locked Locking gt Press 6 Fig 14 the button The symbol G in the button lights up Unlocking gt Press 6 Fig 14 the button The symbol 6 in the button goes out The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button gt It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside safety fea ture e g when stopping at traffic lights etc gt The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever of the respective door gt In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle EJ WARNING a Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the ve hicle in an emergency risk to life a Never leave children in the vehicle unattended Kp Note If the safelock system is switched on page 33 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not work Child safety lock Fig 15 Parental Control Left rear door First read and observe the introductory information and sa
46. days remaining until the next service is due is shown for about 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on Alternatively this information can be displayed manually at any time if required The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or where applicable days until the service due date is reached Note a Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle bat tery is disconnected a f the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display This work is carried out by a specialist garage a In certain national versions the displays appear with Imperial values For more information on the service intervals see page 147 Service intervals Prompt in the segment display Fig 10 Segment display Example of a message mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 28 Explanation of graphic Fig 10 service interval due Differentiating between types of service Days remaining until the next service interval Kilometres remaining until the next service interval A gt S 1 The kilometres remaining until the next service interval are displayed instead of the odometer Differentiating between types of service The service type is determined by the number in position A Fig 10 1 Oil change service 2 Inspection Service due If a servi
47. direction to the arrow 1 gt Push on the light until the spring clicks into place Check that the light is securely inserted Fuses and light bulbs 203 Rear light Rapid BNH 0190 Fig 178 Installing the lamp connector lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Removing gt Open the boot lid gt Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 183 Vehicle tool kit into the hole at the position indicated by the arrow Fig 177 A gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 177 A gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp Fig 177 B gt Grip the tail lamp and carefully remove it by jiggling it out in the opposite direc tion of travel gt Pull the locking mechanism 1 Fig 178 on the connector in the direction of the arrow gt Press the latching mechanism 2 Fig 178 and remove the connector 204 Do it yourself Installing gt Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely gt Insert the lamp into the mounts in the body Fig 178 D gt Carefully press the tail lamp into the body so that the bolts 2 Fig 179 on page 204 on the lamp engage into the mounts in the body M Ensure that the cable bundle does not become pinched between the body and the lamp gt Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover
48. for 10 minutes If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or less gt Do not drive the vehicle You cannot properly seal with tyre with the break down kit If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or more gt Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value see inside of fuel filler Cap gt Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle 190 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system m FJ warninec a A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C If the battery is frozen do not jump start with the battery of another ve hicle there is a risk of explosion a Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment page 162 Emergency equipment and self help 189 BE WARNING Continued The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each other there is a risk of short circuit The jump start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle there is a risk of short circuit Do not clamp the jump start cable to the negative terminal of the dis charged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong
49. for the first time M gt Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the pump gt Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direction to the arrow until it securely engages Fig 131 c gt Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly CAUTION The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly Do not continue filling the fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres containing a reserve of approx 7 litres Unleaded petrol First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 160 Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol in compliance with the EN 228 standard All petrol engines can be operated using petrol that contains at most 10 bioe thanol E10 Required fuel unleaded petrol 95 91 or 92 or 93 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON Unleaded petrol with the oc tane ratings 91 92 or 93 RON can also be used but may result in a slight loss in performance Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol min 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON or higher 1 In Germany also DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for u
50. gt The stationary vehicle is on a steep slope or a steep downhill section gt The idling speed is too high gt The steering angle is too large manoeuvring gt The selector lever position R is selected e g when parking The warning symbol amp appears in the instrument cluster display The automatic start procedure takes place again During the STOP phase the engine fires up without any active driver intervention e g in the following situations gt The vehicle begins to roll e g on a slope gt The difference between the temperature setting of the air conditioning sys tem heating and the temperature of the interior is too large gt The intensive windscreen heater Climatronic or windscreen heater ventilation is switched on with the maximum air temperature setting manual air condition ing system gt The brake pedal was pressed several times the pressure in the braking system is too low gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low gt The current consumption is too high Manually activating deactivating the system Fig 103 Button for the START STOP sys tem First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 Activation deactivation gt Press the symbol button amp Fig 103 When start stop mode is deactivated the warning light in the button lights up If the system is deactivated during the STOP phase the automatic start proce
51. in the boot and is fixed in place with a special bolt Fig 144 Take out the wheel gt Open the boot lid gt Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment gt Remove the box with the tool kit gt Unscrew the bolt Fig 144 in an anti clockwise direction gt Take out the wheel Stow the wheel gt Stow the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well with the rim facing down gt Screw in the bolt Fig 144 in a clockwise direction until the wheel is securely attached gt Place the box with the tool kit back into the spare wheel and secure it with the tape gt Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment gt Close the boot lid Fit a wheel in the appropriate dimensions and design as soon as possible If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adop ted H Temporary spare wheel A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel gt The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel gt Be particularly observant when driving gt The inflation pressure for the temporary spare wheel is identical to the maxi mum inflation pressure for the standard tyres gt Only use this temporary spare wheel to r
52. in the luggage compartment that has been en larged by folding the rear seats forward ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats page 128 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats a f the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied ensure maxi mum safety e g by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision a Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid open or unlatched other wise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle risk of accident Do not transport people in the boot CAUTION Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not dam aged as a result of abrasive objects Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 176 Service life of tyres Class N1 vehicles First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille a lashing set that complies with the EN 12195 standard 1 4 must be used for fastening the load Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle opera tion It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged dur ing the adjustment process or when the sto
53. indicated by the num ber of illuminated warning lights in the switch F warnine If you have a controlled pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through med ication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend not to use the seat heating This can lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal If the seat heating is used we recom mend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition CAUTION Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them a Do not turn on the seat heater if seats are not occupied Do not switch on the seat heating if the seats have objects attached to or placed on them for example a child seat a bag etc A fault of the heating ele ments in the seat heating can occur a f additional seat covers or protective covers are attached to the seats do not turn on the seat heater there is a risk of damaging the seat covers and seat heating a Do not clean the seats using moisture page 159 i Note If the on board voltage drops the seat heating is switched off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control page 174 Automatic load deactivation Front armrest Fig 39 Adjusting armrest AR First read and observe the intro
54. interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system fresh air mode should be selected The cooling system is switched off at excessive coolant temperatures in order to guarantee a cooling effect when the engine is under a high load CAUTION Under certain circumstances air at a temperature of about 5 C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on a Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold E Note We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a specialist garage once every year Heating and air conditioning 79 BNH 0278 Fig 79 The air conditioning system Control elements First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 79 Functions of the individual controls Fig 79 A Set the temperature turn to the left to reduce the temperature turn to the right to increase the temperature Set the blower stage stage O fan off stage 4 highest blower speed Set the direction of the air outlet page 76 lt Switch recirculation on off page 81 A C Switching the cooling system on off i Note The indicator light in the symbol button A C lights up when the ignition is switch ed on even if not all of the conditions for t
55. introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular ba Sis Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion otherwise the rim material will be cor roded Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims CAUTION Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering This means it is necessary to remove the dirt Underbody protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechani cal influences It is not possible to guarantee that the protective coating will not suffer any damage as the vehicle is driven We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the chassis checked preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of winter FJ warnine Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filters or
56. lamp automatic gearbox fog lights with the function CORNER Operating controls for the heating electronic control unit for air condi gt gt tioning system telephone instrument cluster steering angle sender multi function steering wheel ignition key removal lock diagnostic port 33 Interior lighting storage compartment and luggage compartment side lights 24 Central control unit 25 Not assigned 26 Rear window wiper 27 Not assigned 28 Petrol engine Purge valve PTC heater 29 Injection coolant pump 30 Fuel pump ignition system cruise control 31 Lambda probe 32 High pressure fuel pump pressure valve 33 Engine control unit 34 Engine control unit vacuum pump 35 Switch illumination number plate light parking light 36 Main beam 37 Rear fog light DC DC converter 38 Foglights Power consumer Air blower for heating Not assigned Heated front seats Rear window heater Horn Windscreen wipers Boot lid lock central locking system Alarm Cigarette lighter power socket in the luggage compartment ABS Turn signal lights brake lights DC DC converter radio Electric windows driver s window and rear left window Electric windows front passenger s window and rear right Windscreen washer START STOP instrument cluster steering wheel module multi function steering wheel Control unit for automatic g
57. left in the vehicle Children could otherwise start the engine for example risk of accident or injury Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent FJ warninc a Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The ex haust gases from the engine contain substances such as odourless and col ourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas risk to life a Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death CAUTION a The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehi cle is at a standstill The starter or engine may be damaged if the starter is activa ted when the engine is running 3 Fig 90 on page 98 Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 189 Jump starting CAUTION a Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads before the en gine has reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the engine a Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off SA For the sake of the environment Do not warm up
58. locking The function is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is opened Unlocking and opening 37 Fig 18 Boot lid handle opening the boot lid Fig 19 Handle in the inner panelling of the boot lid F Enos First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 37 After unlocking the boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle above the number plate Opening gt Press the button in handle 1 Fig 18 and lift the flap in the direction of the arrow 2 Closing gt Pull the lid down with handle 3 Fig 19 and close with a slight swing 38 Using the system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 37 If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed the lid is immediately locked automatically when closed The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by a specialist garage Delayed locking If the boot lid was locked using the symbol button lt s on the remote control key it is possible to open the boot lid within a limited period of time after it has been closed There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked au tomatically Therefore the vehicle must always be locked amp using the symbol but ton on the remote control Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time i Note More detailed information ab
59. of the steering wheel and chest despite the driver s seat being correctly adjus ted gt If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability gt If different seats have been fitted e g orthopaedic seats without side airbags The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key operated switch page 140 We recommend that you ask a SKODA service partner to deactivate any other air bags Monitoring the airbag system The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically includ ing when one of the airbags is switched off Airbag deactivated using diagnostic equipment gt The warning light 2 lights up for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then flashes again for approximately 12 seconds Front passenger airbag deactivated using the key switch in the storage com partment gt The warning light 2 lights up for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition is switched on gt The indicator light OFF 3 Fig 123 on page 140 lights up after the ignition is switched on 1 The warning light OFF 2 comes on for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on goes out for about 1 second and then comes on again 140 Safety i Note The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed A SKODA service partner will be able to inform you which if any of your vehi cle s airbags can or mus
60. of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold recirculated air mode AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 82 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle e g when driving through a tunnel or in a traffic jam Heating and air conditioning 83 Switching on off gt Press the symbol button amp The symbol lt pos 7 Fig 80 on page 82 appears in the display gt Press the symbol button lt again The lt gt symbol in the display goes out E WARNING Never leave recirculated air mode switched on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause driver and passenger fatigue reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up Increased risk of accident Switch off recir culated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Note If recirculated air mode is switched on for around 15 minutes the lt gt symbol will begin to flash in the display as a sign that recirculated air mode has been switch ed on for a long time If the recirculated air mode is not switched off the symbol flashes for around 5 minutes Controlling blower AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 82 The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the
61. own Safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A Fig 1 3between the steer ing wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm gt Adjust the driver s seat in the forward back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs gt Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle 1 Not valid for sports seat 128 Safety gt Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head B gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 130 Using seat belts Driver seat adjustment page 53 Adjusting the front seats Correct seated position for the front passenger First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 127 For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed gt Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the top of your head B Fig 113 on page 128 gt Cor
62. page 160 EI warnine The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canister in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehi cle for safety reasons in the event of an accident these canisters can become damaged and fuel may escape risk of fire CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and the exhaust system Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle s paintwork risk of paint damage a f the vehicle was not purchased in the country where it was intended to be op erated you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is of fered in the country where the vehicle will be operated You should also perhaps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel for operation of the vehicle in the corresponding country Is this not the case then you must check whether it is permitted by the manufacturer to operate the vehicle with an other fuel type 160 General Maintenance Refuelling Fig 131 Fuel filler First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 160 Vehicles without lockable fuel filler flap gt Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 131 gt Open the flap manually in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Hol
63. page 191 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Note We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a specialist garage Replacing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 When replacing a battery the new vehicle battery must have the same capacity voltage amperage and be the same size Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased from a specialist garage We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be dis posed of in accordance with national regulations Disconnecting and reconnecting First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 On disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery the following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault free 174 General Maintenance Operation Operating measure Enter the radio navigation system code num User manual of the radio ber or user manual of the naviga tion system Setting the clock Data in the multifunction display are deleted page 25 page 13 Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage in order to en sure full functionality of all electrical systems Automatic load deactivation First read and observe the introductory information and safety war
64. page 96 The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force The power steering only works when the engine is running It is still fully possible to steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the en gine is not running e g when towing However greater physical effort is re quired to turn the steering wheel CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic immobiliser 98 Ignition switch 98 Starting the engine 98 Switching off the engine 99 The engine can only be started using a correctly coded original key The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after Starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem FJ WARNING a When driving without the engine running the ignition key must always be in the position 2 Fig 90 on page 98 ignition switched on This position is indicated by the illumination of certain indicator lights in the instrument clus CER a If the key is not in position 2 this could lead to unexpected the steering locking risk of accident Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has come to a complete stop by applying the handbrake Otherwise the steering could be blocked risk of accident I WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle the ignition must always be removed This is par ticularly important if children are
65. properly protect you hazard When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed a Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as they may get caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate Passive Safety 127 EI warnine Information for the front passenger Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to proper ly protect you risk to life a Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the dash panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury when braking or in the event of an accident If an airbag is deployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position Correct seated position for the driver Fig 113 The correct distance of the driver to the steering wheel correctly adjusted head restraint First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 127 For your
66. read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean warm water and soap CAUTION a Never wipe headlights with a dry cloth a Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses as this may damage the protective paintwork and consequently cause cracks to form on the headlight lenses a Do not use any harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents to clean the head lights as this could damage the headlight lenses Door lock cylinders First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Specific products must be used for de icing door lock cylinders 156 General Maintenance CAUTION When washing your vehicle ensure as little water as possible gets into the lock ing cylinders Cavity protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory This wax protection does not need to be inspected or re applied If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures these must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner EI WARNING Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re move wax risk of fire Wheels First read and observe the
67. safety warn ings on page 105 Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct If the inflation pressure is too low the tyres will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will wor sen Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Avoiding unnecessary ballast First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Transporting ballast costs fuel Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption Therefore we rec ommend to carry no unnecessary weight It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the ve hicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre 100 kilometres At a speed of 100 120 km h your vehicle that is fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load will use use about 10 more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic drag Regular maintenance First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage you create the conditions needed for economical
68. spark which results from the engine being started Route the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment Do not bend over the battery there is a risk of caustic burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly Keep any sources of ignition naked flame lit cigarettes etc away from the battery there is a risk of explosion a Never jump start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels risk of ex plosion and chemical burns CAUTION a There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected a The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehi cle a We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle Fig 155 Jump starting A flat battery B battery providing current 190 Do it yourself First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 189 The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump start your vehicle if the en gine will not start because the battery is flat Jump start cables are required for this purpose The jump start cables must be attached in the following sequence gt Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery A Fig 155 gt Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the b
69. telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following functions gt Phone Phonebook page 86 gt Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering wheel page 87 gt Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display page 89 gt Voice control of the telephone page 90 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 92 Communication and multimedia 85 All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle s hands free system is established with the help of Bluetooth technology Phone Phonebook First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 A phone phonebook is part of the hands free system This phone phonebook can be used depending on the type of mobile phone After the first connection of the telephone the system begins to load the phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit Control telephone from the multifunction steering wheel Version 1 Fig 81 Multifunction steering wheel Control buttons for the telephone First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 To minimize driver distraction when operating the telephone the basic tele phone s functions can be set by simply operating the buttons located on the steering wheel Fig 81 Button adjust ment Action Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands free syst
70. the vehicle is in your line of sight a f the driver door is open the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control key Operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal interfer ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency range e g mobile phone TV transmitter Note For vehicles with an anti theft alarm system the acoustic signals can also be acti vated deactivated when locking unlocking at a SKODA partner Safe securing system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 31 The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside Afterwards it is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside This fact is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instrument cluster after switching off the ignition Check deadlock Owner s manual CHECK SAFELOCK If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off the door can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever Switching off The safelock can be switched off by locking twice within 2 seconds Switching on The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and unlocked Switch on display The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer inter
71. the window aerial These may get damaged a Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush risk of damage to the surface of the panelling a Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned a Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product SA For the sake of the environment Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regula tions es I are Note Due to the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any potential prob lems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle we recommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA service partner Vehicle care 157 Natural leather First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 157 Leather is a natural material with specific properties and requires regular clean ing and maintenance The leather should be cleaned on a regular basis depending on the amount of Wear and tear Dust and dirt in the pores and folds act as abrasive materials This leads to severe corrosion and the premature brittleness of the leather surface We recommend that you remove dust regularly and at short intervals using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water dampened cotton or woollen cloth and then dry with a clean dry cl
72. the control lever page 45 The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on When the high beam or headlight flasher is on the warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster When the left or right turn signal is on the warning light amp or gt gt flashes in the instrument cluster Convenience turn signal If you only wish to flash three times briefly push the lever to the upper or lower pressure point and release again Turn signal for changing lanes to only flash briefly only move the lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position F WARNING Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled _ Note a The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off a The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a curve or after making a turn a The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal light fails Fog lights ROZS Light switch First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Switching on off gt Turn the light switch to position 20 or 3 Fig 23 gt Pull the light switch to position 1 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on page 14 Fog lights with CORNER function
73. the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower Starting off and Driving 97 i Note After switching off the ignition the radiator fan may intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes Electronic immobiliser First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 97 An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deacti vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is withdrawn from the lock The engine will not start if a non authorized ignition key is used The following message is shown in the information cluster display O Immobilizer active 8 IMMOBILISER Ignition switch Fig 90 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock BNH 0198 98 Driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 97 Petrol engines Fig 90 1 Ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine Diesel engines Fig 90 1 Fuel supply interrupted ignition switched off engine switched off the steer ing can be locked 2 Heating glow plugs on ignition switched on 3 Starti
74. the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted 136 Safety CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front airbags 7 Side airbags 138 Head airbags 139 Front airbags po WARNING Correct seated position a t is important that the driver and front passenger maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dashboard A Fig 120 Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to in juries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct There must not by any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag Fig 119 Driver s airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the E WARNING dash panel Front airbag and transporting children a Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a prop er restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 139 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of th
75. the individual controls Fig 78 A Set the temperature turn to the left to reduce the temperature turn to the right to increase the temperature Set the blower stage stage 0 fan off stage 4 highest blower speed Set the direction of the air outlet page 76 lt Switch recirculation on off page 79 AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 77 Controls A and C Fig 78 can be set to any intermediate position Control dial settings Fig 78 on page 78 Symbol button Fig 78 Air outlet vents 4 Fig 77 on Adjustment A on page 78 page 76 Defrosting the windshield and side To the right up to the 3 R T I Open and align with the side win windows stop dow Free windshield and side windows Wo Open and align with the side win ee Desired temperature 2 or 3 W EJ Do not switch on ce As far as it will go to Wo Fastest heating the right 3 Pal Briefly switch on Opening Comfortable heating Desired temperature 2or3 v5 A Do not switch on Opening Fresh air mode ventilation Tonne pe me 1 4 5 Do not switch on Opening 78 Using the system We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 77 on page 76 in the open position in all operating modes i Note If the air distribution is positioned only towards the windows the total amount of air is used to defrost the windows and thus no air will be fed to the footwell This can lead to restriction
76. the introductory information given on page 90 The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to carry them out is called dialogue The system gives audible feedback and guides you through the relevant functions if necessary Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors gt Speak at a normal volume without intonation or excessive pauses gt Avoid poor pronunciation gt Close the doors windows and sliding roof in order to reduce or eliminate dis turbing noise from outside gt It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise gt During the dialogue limit background noise in the vehicle e g passengers talk ing at the same time gt Do not speak when the system is making an announcement The microphone for voice control is housed in the moulded headliner and directed towards the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front pas senger can operate the equipment Entering a phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous sequence of numbers spo ken one after the other the whole number at once or in the form of digit blocks separated by short pauses After each string of digits separated by a brief pause in speaking all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system The digits 0 9 and symbols gt are permitted The system does not re
77. the spare wheel There is also space here for the removable ball rod for the trailer towing device The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel The components of the vehicle tool kit depending on vehicle equip ment Fig 149 Screwdriver Adapter for anti theft wheel bolts Towing eye Clamps for removing the wheel trims Car jack Wheel wrench Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps Replacement bulb set ES CES CSE Screw the car jack back into its initial position after use in order to store it back in the box with the vehicle tool kit Emergency equipment and self help 183 EI WARNING a The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle Under no circumstances use it to lift heavier vehicles or other loads risk of injury a Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot a Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Preliminary work 184 Changing a wheel 185 Follow up work 185 Loosening tightening wheel bolts 185 Raising the vehicle 186 Securing wheels against theft 186 FI warnine f you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal re quirements must be observed a Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat an
78. then every 2 years Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause vapour bubbles to form in the brake system on sharp braking This can impair the effi ciency of the brakes risk of accident Information about the KODA service Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 147 You have access to an extensive servicing network of SKODA Service Partners for the maintenance of your vehicle The SKODA Service Partners feature modern and specially developed tools and equipment Here trained specialists have a comprehensive range of SKODA Genu ine Parts and SKODA Genuine Accessories at their disposal All SKODA Service Partners operate in accordance with the latest manufacturer guidelines and instructions All service work is therefore carried out on time and in accordance with the quality standards Adhering to these guidelines and in structions helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good techni cal condition The SKODA Service Partners also offer a wide range of other services SKODA Service Partners are therefore properly equipped to service your vehicle and to provide high quality work We therefore recommend that you have your vehicle maintained by a SKODA Service Partner CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Tests required by law 150 KODA Service Partners 50 SKODA Genuine Parts 150 SKODA Genuine Accessories 151
79. to life a Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside for ex ample at road crossings i Note a In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehi cle a Only the driver s door can be unlocked or locked using the key if the central locking system fails page 32 The other doors and the tailgate can be emer gency locked or emergency released a Emergency locking of the door page 194 a Emergency unlocking of the boot lid page 194 Unlocking and opening 31 Vehicle key Fig 11 Key without with remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 31 Two keys are provided with the vehicle Fig 11 A Keys without remote control B Keys with remote control remote control keys The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The operating range of the remote control key is approx 30 m But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak The remote control key has a fold open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine The spare key must by initialised by a specialist garage after repair or replace ment of the receiver unit Only then can
80. to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds it starts to roll back The HHC is active from a 5 slope if the driver s door is closed HHC is only ever active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off When driving downhill it is inactive CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function TB Activation deactivation 114 E WARNING The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they may not be recognised by the system sensors Before reversing you should make sure that there are no small obstacles such as rocks thin posts trailer drawbars etc behind your vehicle Such ob stacles may not be recognised by the system sensors a Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain objects and types of cloth ing cannot reflect the system signals Thus these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system
81. to time Inspecting and replenishing 169 Loss of coolant eG WARNING A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system Do not merely top up the coolant Have the cooling system checked by a specialist a The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following garage L warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 162 a If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking Fig 138 on page 170 do not continue your journey risk of accident Seek help from a specialist garage First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Do not use used brake fluid the function of the brake system may be im ings HJ on page 168 paired risk of accident Only top up with new coolant gt Switch off the engine a CAUTION gt Allow the engine to cool Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle gt Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the cap carefully Note gt Replenish the coolant i gt Turn the cap until it clicks into place The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an emergency In this case use just water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible a Fig 138 Engine compartment Br
82. travelled the re Operating conditions of the system u quired minimum distance for START STOP mode Manually activating deactivating the system 17 a If on vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever positions D S or N Information messages CB are selected after driving in reverse the vehicle will first need to achieve a speed of over 10 km h before automatic engine shut down can take place again a Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal temper ature of the vehicle battery even after several hours If the vehicle remains out doors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight it can take sev eral hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the START STOP system a f Climatronic is running in automatic mode the engine may not switch off auto matically under certain conditions The START STOP system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing harmful exhaust emissions and CO emissions The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on In the start stop mode the engine automatically switches to the vehicle s idle phase e g when stopped at traffic lights The engine restarts automatically where necessary The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met v The driver s door is closed Starting shutting down the engine v Thedriver has fasten
83. u BNH 0051 D d DN 180 General Maintenance First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 Extracting gt Push the extraction pliers page 183 sufficiently far onto the cap until the in ner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap Fig 145 gt Remove the cap Installing gt Push the caps onto the wheel bolts up to the stop The wheel bolt caps are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the stor age space for the spare wheel m First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design Each time you fit other wheels rims e g light alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres you must also use the matching wheel bolts with the correct length and dome shape This is a prerequisite for ensuring that wheels are attached correctly i This chapter contains information on the following subjects Winter tyres Snow chains 1818 Winter tyres Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 180 Fitting winter tyres will significantly improve the handling of your vehicle when driving in wintry road conditions Summer tyres have less grip on ice snow and at temperatures below 7 C This is especially true of vehicles fitted with wide tyres or high speed tyres In order to achieve the best possible han
84. used Only use factory supplied footmats or footmats from the range of SKODAOriginal Accessories which are fitted to two attachment points FJ warnine No objects may be placed in the driver s footwell risk due to obstruction or limitation of pedal operation CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Modes and use of selector lever 102 Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic 103 Starting off and driving 103 Malfunction 104 Starting off and Driving 101 FI warnine Do not depress the accelerator if changing the forward driving mode risk of accident a Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving risk of acci dent a When the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running the vehicle must be held in mode D S or R with the brake pedal Even when the engine is idling the power transmission is never completely interrupted the vehicle crawls CAUTION a f the selector lever is moved to mode N while driving the accelerator pedal must be released and you will need to wait until the engine has reached its idling speed before moving the selector lever to a forward driving mode again a At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in the selector lev er position P a When stopping on a slope never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal this may lead to gear damage Note After the ignition is switched off the ignition ke
85. vehicle is stationary gt Setting the hours minutes page 13 gt Enable disable the display of the second speed page 13 gt Service intervals Display of the number of days and kilometres remaining until the next service page 28 CoS 1 Applies to vehicles using the MAXI DOT display 2 Applies to vehicles with a segment display 10 Using the system 6 Button for gt Reset daily trip counter page 12 gt Set hours minutes gt enable disable the mode selected by means of the 5 key Fuel gauge page 12 Revolution counter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 The red scale of the revolution counter 1 Fig 2 on page 10 indicates the range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed The system automatically restricts the engine speed to a steady limit You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolution counter is reached or select mode D on the automatic gearbox Follow the recommended gear to prevent engine speeds that are too high or too low page 24 Display 4 18 Fig 3 m aa Display types 5 D km h IDO km a2 a 14 1 2 3 4 7 0 R 1 1 Applies to vehicles using the MAXI DOT display 2 This function only applies to certain countries First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 The instrument cluster can have one of the following typ
86. way The following guidelines must be observed a The mounts on the cover C Fig 63 must be engaged into the bolts on the side trim panel B a The items which are transported must not exceed the height of the luggage compartment cover in the lower position a The cover must not be jammed in the seal of the boot lid when it is in the opened position a There must be no object in the gap between the opened cover and the rear backrest Note T fe eres a If the support straps A Fig 63 are attached to the boot then the boot cover will raise when the boot is opened a After removing the luggage compartment cover store it in such a way that it cannot be damaged or soiled Seats and useful equipment 67 Parking position of the boot cover uy CAUTION a The following information applies to Rapid Spaceback vehicles a Before setting the parking position of the luggage compartment cover the variable loading floor must be put in the desired position page 70 a If the luggage compartment cover is in the parking position the parking po sition of the variable loading floor cannot be set page 732 BNH 0194 Fig 64 Parking position of the luggage compartment cover Rapid Rapid Spaceback First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 Adjustment gt Rapid Slide the dismantled cover between the rear seat backrest and the bolt A Fig 64 gt
87. wheel dash panel or windscreen Fig 115 A In certain cir cumstances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries Seat belts 131 It is also important that rear passengers fasten their seat belts as they could oth erwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident Rear seat passengers who have not fastened their seat belts are a danger not only to themselves but also to those seated at the front Fig 115 B Fastening and unfastening seat belts Aarons ed s BNH 0111 Fig 117 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Rout ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother 1 Not valid for sports seat 132 Safety First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 130 Fasten gt Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt page 53 gt Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis gt Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat Fig 116 A until it au dibly clicks into place gt Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maxi
88. windscreen washer system can be used gt Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the ve hicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the en gine is running If the engine is not running significantly more physical force is re quired to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle If using a tow rope ensure that it is always kept taught CAUTION Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 189 Jump starting a f the gearbox no longer contains any oil because of a defect your vehicle must only be towed with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or ona special breakdown vehicle or trailer a The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km To protect both vehicles when tow starting or towing the tow rope should be elastic Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a simi larly elastic material a While towing take care to avoid impermissibly high tensile forces or jerky loads There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a veh
89. with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons the con centration of coolant additive can be increased up to a maximum of 60 anti freeze protection down to approx 40 C When refilling only use antifreeze with the name specified on the coolant expan sion tank Fig 137 on page 169 EJ WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 162 a Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to fill with coolant under the current circumstances Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage CAUTION a The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must never be under 40 Over 60 of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protection and cooling effect a A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specifications can sig nificantly reduce the corrosion protection a Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can conse quently result in major engine damage Do not fill the coolant above the mark A Fig 137 on page 169 a f a fault causes the engine to overheat we recommend visiting a specialist ga rage a
90. you release the brake pedal Start the engine by pressing the gas pedal or by moving the selector lever into a different mode and releasing the brake pedal If the selector lever is moved into position R during the STOP phase the engine will re start No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low speed e g during a traffic jam or when tuning and remains stationary after pressing the brake pedal lightly Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force Operating conditions of the system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 The START STOP system is very complex Some of the procedures are hard to check without servicing No engine shut down is carried out Before each STOP phase the system checks whether certain conditions have been met No engine shut down takes place in the following situations gt The engine has not reached the minimum temperature for the START STOP mode gt The temperature inside the vehicle has not reached the desired temperature set in the air conditioning system heating gt The external temperature is very low high gt The intensive windscreen heater Climatronic or windscreen heater ventilation is switched on with the maximum air temperature setting manual air condition ing system gt The parking aid is activated gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low
91. 00 1100 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 570 570 a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 Technical data 209 1 2 ltr 77 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 7715000 175 1550 4100 4 1197 Performances Rapid MG6 Rapid Spaceback MG6 Top speed km h 195 193 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 3 10 2 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1100 2 1200 1100 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 1 4 Itr 90 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm 580 Max torque Nm per rpm 580 Number of cylinders displacement cm 90 5000 200 1500 4000 4 1390 Driving performances Rapid DSG7 Rapid Spaceback DSG7 Top speed km h 206 203 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 9 5 9 4 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1200 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 610 610 1 6 1 77 kW MPI engine Output kW per rpm 77 15600 Max torque Nm per rpm 153 3800 Number of cylinders displacement cm 4 1598 Performances Rapid MG5 Rapid WG6 Rapid Spaceback MG5 Rapid Spaceback WG6 Top speed km h 193 192 191 190 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 6 11 9 10 5 11 8 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1000 2 1200 1000 2 1200 1000
92. 00 km or every 1 year Brake fluid change First change after 3 years then every 2 years a whichever comes first EE WARNING The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and then every 2 years Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause vapour bubbles to form in the brake system on sharp braking This can impair the effi ciency of the brakes risk of accident 148 General Maintenance Note For diesel operation with a high sulphur content the oil must be changed every 7500 km Ask your specialist garage for information on the countries where diesel fuel has a high sulphur content Variable service interval QI6 AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 147 The service intervals depend on the intensity at which the vehicle is driven and the local conditions in which the vehicle is used For example your vehicle is sub jected to different loads when driven over short distances than when driven over long distances The service intervals are therefore variable After the first 30 000 km or 2 years then every 30 000 km Inspection J or every 1 year According to the service interval display at the latest after 30 000 km or 2 years Oil change service Brake fluid change First change after 3 years then every 2 years a whichever comes first E WARNING The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and
93. 1 Applies to Rapid Spaceback 70 Using the system CAUTION The two sided floor covering can only be installed in the luggage compartment of vehicles with the variable loading floor when the variable load floor is in the up per position page 71 i Note For easier turning of the covering use the loop attached CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Setting in the upper position 71 Setting in the lower position 72 Removing inserting Folding up down 73 Parking position 73 The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier The variable loading floor can be set to the upper or lower position For easier handling of the spare tire for example the variable loading floor can be set to two positions page 73 Folding up down and page 73 Parking posi tion CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg For the trans port of heavy loads adjust the variable loading floor to the lower position or re move it from the vehicle Setting in the upper position LG _ ee _JBNt 0272 Fig 70 Set variable loading floor to the upper position variable loading floor in the upper position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 70 The variable loading floor in the lower position can be set to the upper position as follows
94. 1 to the stop Fig 105 gt Hold the tow bar with your left hand 120 Driving gt Using your right hand pull the handwheel B in the direction of the arrow 2 and drag in the direction of the arrow 3 to the stop The handwheel remains locked in this position Ready position Fig 106 JV Thekey C is in the unlocked position the arrow on the key points to the padlock open icon The key cannot be removed V The locking balls D can be pushed fully into the tow bar Y Y The red marking E on the handwheel points to the white marking on the Dall bar There is a clear gap of approx 4 mm F between the handwheel and the tow bar The tow bar is now ready to be inserted into the mounting recess EI WARNING If the tow bar cannot be correctly placed in the ready position then it must not be used CAUTION When in the ready position the key cannot be removed from the handwheel lock Fitting the ball head Fig 108 Fit the lock cap BNH 0263 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 gt Remove the cover for the mounting recess 4 Fig 104 on page 119 in a down wards direction gt Put the tow bar in the ready position page 120 gt Grip the tow bar from underneath Fig 107 and insert into the mounting recess until it audibly clicks into place H The handwheel A rotates back automatically and rests on the ball rod E
95. 126 126 127 130 130 133 135 135 136 139 142 142 145 147 147 149 152 153 157 160 160 162 166 168 Brake fluid 170 Vehicle battery _ gt YT Wheels 175 Tyres and wheelrims Y T5 Winter operation 180 Emergency equipment and self help 182 Emergency equipment 182 Changing a wheel 184 Tyre repair 187 Jump starting 189 Towing the vehicle 191 Remote control 193 Emergency unlocking locking 194 Replacing windscreen wiper blades 195 Fuses and light bulbs 197 Fuses 197 Bulbs 200 Technical data 207 Vehicle data lt o o o o ss 207 4 Table of Contents Materials defect liability Your SKODA Partner as a vendor is liable to you for material damage to your new SKODA car SKODA Genuine Parts or SKODA Genuine Accessories in accordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement SKODA warranty for new cars As well as the materials defect liability KODA AUTO a s grants you the KODA warranty for new cars hereinafter referred to as KODA warranty according to the conditions described below As part of the KODA warranty KODA AUTO a s will guarantee the following services gt Repair of damage to your vehicle that occurs within two years from the start of the SKODA warranty gt Repair of paint damage to your vehicle that occurs within three years from the start of the
96. 1474 1500 P 1472 1484 Clearance 136 143 134 141 Wheel base 2602 2602 1457 1494 1457 1494 1463 1500 1463 1500 Height Track gauge front rear a Valid for vehicles with the Amundsent navigation system b Applies to vehicles with a rough road package Applies to cars fitted with the 1 2 1 55 kW MPI and 1 2 1 63 kW TSI engines and 14 wheel rims Vehicle specific details per engine type AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 207 The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles 1 2 1 55 kW MPI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 55 5400 112 3750 3 1198 Rapid MG5 Rapid Spaceback MG5 Driving performances Top speed km h 175 172 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 13 9 13 8 Permissible trailer load braked kg 750 2 9502 750 2 950 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 560 560 a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 63 4800 160 1500 3500 4 1197 Driving performances Rapid MG5 Rapid Spaceback MG5 Top speed km h 183 180 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 11 8 11 7 Permissible trailer load braked kg 900 2 1100 9
97. 2 1200 1000 2 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Slopes up to 12 b Slopes up to 8 210 Technical data 570 590 570 590 1 6 I 66 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 66 4200 230 1500 2500 4 1598 Driving performances Rapid MG5 Rapid DSG7 Rapid Spaceback MG5 Rapid Spaceback DSG7 Top speed km h 184 186 184 182 184 182 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 12 0 12 2 TLS 12 1 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1200 1200 1200 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a GreenLine 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm 7714400 630 640 Max torque Nm per rpm 250 1500 2500 630 640 Number of cylinders displacement cm 4 1598 Driving performances Rapid MG5 Rapid Spaceback MG5 Top speed km h 190 190 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 4 10 3 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1200 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg Multi purpose vehicles AF 630 AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 207 1 2 1 55 kW MPI Maximum permissi 1595 1640 ble gross weight kg a Applies to vehicles with a rough road package b Valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox GreenLine 1 2 1 63 kW TSI 1615 1660 1 2 1 77 kW TSI
98. 26 Safety Safety equipment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 126 The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle gt Three point seat belts for all the seats gt Belt force limiters for the front seats gt Belt tensioners for the front seats gt Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger gt Side airbags gt Head airbags gt Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system gt Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system gt Head restraints adjustable for height gt Adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used If the seat belt is not fastened properly this may result in injuries if an airbag is activated in the event of an accident Before setting off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 126 For your own Safety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off gt Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are f
99. 33 Fig 115 Driver without a fastened seat belt rear passenger without a fas tened seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 130 As soon as the vehicle is moving so called kinetic energy the energy of motion is produced both in terms of the car as well as in terms of the occupants The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants The greater the speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The idea that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor acci dent is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 50 km h the forces that your body is ex posed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric ton 1000 kg For example a person s weight of 80 kg increases to 4 8 tons 4800 kg at 50 km h In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt are thrown forward and strike parts of the vehicle interior in an uncontrolled manner such as the steering
100. 8 Storage compartment on the passenger side ___ 63 Storage compartments 56 Storage compartments inthe boot _ 9 Storage compartments in the doors 57 Storage pockets on the front seats 64 Sunroof CB sunshade 48 Sun visors 47 Switch Seelgnition CSCS B Switching off the engine 99 Switch light on off 41 218 Index T Taking care of the vehicle Natural leather Seat belts Taking care of your vehicle Automatic car wash system Cavity protection Chrome parts Cleaning the wheels Decorative films Door lock cylinders Headlight lenses High pressure cleaner Plastic parts Polishing the paintwork Rubber seals Taking care of the interior Taking care of your vehicle exterior Washing Washing by hand Wash system Wax treatment Taking care of your vehicles Fabric covers TCS Operation Technical data Telephone Temporary spare wheel Tiptronic Tools TOP TETHER Towing Towing a trailer Towing device Description Drawbar load Use and care 158 159 153 156 155 156 155 156 156 153 154 154 155 157 153 152 152 153 154 159 112 207 85 179 103 183 146 191 119 119 119 122 Towing eye Front 192 Rear 192 Towing protection 36 Traction Control System TCS 112 Trailer 119 123 13 p
101. Fig 136 risk of damaging the exhaust system Replenishing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 166 gt Check the oil level page 167 gt Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening Fig 134 on page 165 gt Replenish the oil in portions of 0 5 litres in accordance with the correct specifi cations page 167 gt Check the oil level page 167 gt Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully 168 General Maintenance Changing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 166 The engine oil must be changed according to prescribed service inter vals page 147 or according to the service interval display page 28 Service in terval display CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Capacity 169 Checking the coolant level 169 Replenishing 170 The coolant consists of water with coolant additive This mixture guarantees anti freeze protection protects the cooling heater system against corrosion and pre vents lime formation Vehicles exported to countries with a mild climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 25 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40 Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory filled
102. Headlight flasher 43 Indicator lights 14 Low beam 41 Main beam 43 Parking light 41 Rear fog light 44 switching on off 41 Turn signal 43 Loads 207 Locking Individual settings 34 Key 32 Remote control 33 Vehicle key 32 Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside 34 Low beam 41 Luggage compartment 64 Cover 67 Emergency unlocking 194 Fastening elements 65 Fixing nets 66 Lighting 64 Unlocking the tailgate 194 Variable loading floor 70 Luggage compartment cover 67 Luggage compartment lid 37 M Main beam 43 Indicator light 21 Maintenance 107 Decorative films 155 Manual air conditioning Adjusting 81 Recirculated air mode 81 216 Index Manual gear changing see gear changing 101 Manually setting air conditioning Control elements 80 Materials defect liability 5 MAXI DOT See MAXI DOT display 27 MAXI DOT display 27 Main menu 28 Operation 22 Settings 28 Maximum speed 209 MDI 95 Meshed pocket for storage 70 Meshed pockets on the front seat backrests _ _ 64 MFD See multifunction display 25 Mirror Exterior mirror 50 Vanity 47 Mobile phone 85 Connecting to the hands free system 88 Modes of the automatic transmission 102 Modifications 149 Modifications and technical alterations Airbags 151 Service 150 Spoiler 151 Multifunction display Functions 25 Information 26 Memory 25 Operation 22 Multimedia 92 Multimedia holder
103. It benefits the durability and reliability of the engine Door boot or engine compartment warning First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 Vehicles with a MAXI DOT display If at least one door the boot or bonnet is open the display indicates the relevant open door boot or bonnet vehicle icon An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km h Vehicles with a segment display If at least one door or the tailgate is open the amp warning light in the instrument cluster lights up page 15 Compass point display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 For vehicles with a factory fitted navigation system an abbreviation for each point of the compass depending on the current direction of travel is shown on the top left hand corner of the display The compass point display only operates when the ignition is switched on CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Memory 85 Information overview 26 Warning at excessive speeds 27 The driving data is displayed on the multifunction display The multifunction display only operates when the ignition is switched on After the ignition is switched on the function that was last selected before switching off the ignition is displayed For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display the menu item MFA must be selected and c
104. Never cover the engine with additional insulation material e g with a cover risk of fire The bonnet must always be properly closed when driving Therefore the lock must always be checked after closing the bonnet in order to ensure that it has engaged properly If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving stop the ve hicle immediately and close the bonnet risk of accident CAUTION Always top up using the correct specification of fluids This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage SA For the sake of the environment In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids and the special tools and knowledge required for such work we recommend that flu ids be changed by a specialist garage i Note a Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids a Fluids with the correct specifications can be purchased from SKODA Original Ac cessories 164 General Maintenance Opening and closing the bonnet g BNH 0006 Fig 133 Securing the bonnet First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 162 Opening gt Open the corresponding front door gt Pull the release lever underneath the dash panel in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 132 Before opening the bonnet ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork c
105. Never remove the tow bar while the trailer is still coupled CAUTION a f the handwheel is not turned all the way to the stop then it will return to its initial position when the tow bar is removed and will rest on the tow bar and not engage into the ready position The tow bar will then need to be brought into this position before the next time it is fitted The mounting recess must be closed with the cover following removal This pre vents foreign bodies from getting into the mounting recess ate I Pent a We recommend putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar a Clean any dirt from the tow bar before stowing it away in the box with the vehi cle tool kit Note Use and care First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 Close the mounting recess with the cover to prevent any dirt from getting in Always check the tow bar before hitching a trailer Apply suitable grease where necessary Use the protective cover when stowing away the tow bar in order to stop the boot from getting dirty In the event of dirt clean the surfaces of the mounting recess and treat with a suitable preservative CAUTION Apply grease to the upper part of the mounting recess Make sure you do not re move any grease CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Loading a trailer 123 Driving with a tr
106. P TETHER system Fig 128 Anchor eyelets on the TOP TETHER system NO 7 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 145 The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER system are located on the back of the outer rear seat backrests Fig 128 146 Safety General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Overview of service intervals _ GZ Fixed service intervals QI QI4 148 Variable service interval QI6 148 Information about the KODA service _ WC The service interval display in the instrument cluster will remind you to carry out every service stipulated by the manufacturer at the right time in order to prevent you from forgetting any Timely and proper performance of servicing works is one of the requirements for the settlement of potential warranty claims The completion of services can be verified by the validated service certificate and the corresponding receipts The specified service intervals are tailored to normal operating conditions In the case of difficult operating conditions it is necessary to have some service work performed before the date of the next service or between the specified service intervals This applies mainly to the cleaning or the replacement of the air filter insert in regions with heavy dust pollution as well as checking and replacing the toothed belt but also to
107. Push the variable loading floor in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go and until its front part C Fig 72 is raised 72 Using the system gt Place the variable loading floor in direction of arrow 4 CAUTION When setting the variable loading floor to the lower position the luggage com partment cover must not be in the parking position page 68 Removing inserting HONS Remove variable loading floor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 70 Removing gt Grasp the variable loading floor at handle A Fig 73 gt Lift the variable loading floor in the direction of arrow 1 until its rear area is about 15 cm B below the luggage compartment cover F gt Remove the variable loading floor from the vehicle by moving it in the direction of arrow 2 Inserting gt Grasp the variable loading floor at handle A Fig 73 gt Insert variable loading floor into the vehicle with the front portion tilted about 15 cm B beneath the luggage compartment cover M gt Then follow the same steps as when setting the upper position page 71 Set ting in the upper position or the lower position page 72 Setting in the lower position CAUTION a When removing or inserting the variable loading floor the maximum distance of 15 cm B Fig 73 underneath the boot cover must be adhered to risk of damag ing the boot lid seal a When i
108. Replacing wheels Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 The service life of tyres depends on the inflation pressure driving style and other circumstances Following the advice below can extend the service life of your tyres Tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 141 B The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres With greater additional load adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced When driving however there are a range of factors that may result in an imbalance This may become apparent by a vibration in the steering Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres Wheel alignment errors Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear of the tyres Tyre damage Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims We recommend checking yo
109. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA Rapid Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual has been systematically designed to make it easy for you to search for and obtain the information you require Chapters table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner s manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy to read chapters The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Sub ject index at the end of the Owner s Manual helps you to rapidly find the informa tion you are looking for Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle Units of measurement All values are expressed in metric units Explanation of symbols a Denotes a reference to a section with important information and safety advice in a chapter Denotes the end of a section Denotes the continuation of a section on the next page Indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possi ble Denotes a registered trademark Indicates the texts displayed in the MAXI DOT screen Indicates the texts shown in the segment display Ov E Display In this owner s manual the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the display illustration provided it is not otherwise stated Notes
110. SKODA Genuine Parts if required a We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit The anti theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a KODA Part ner CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Breakdown kit 188 Preparations for using the breakdown kit 188 Sealing and inflating the tyre 188 Check after 10 minutes driving 189 Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to approx 4 mm A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist garage The wheel must not be removed during repair Do not remove foreign bodies e g screws or nails from the tyre The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances gt There is damage to the rim gt The outside temperature is less than 20 C gt The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size gt There is damage to the tyre wall gt Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre gt If the use by date see inflation bottle has passed EJ warnine a A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre Do not travel faster than 80 km h a Avoid accelerating at full throttle shar
111. SKODA Partner They will also provide you with detailed terms and conditions for the mobility warranty with re spect to your vehicle In the event that there is no mobility warranty coverage available for your vehicle you should check with any SKODA Service Partner about the possibility of a subsequent agreement Bie Note The mobility warranty is only available for some countries Optional SKODA extended warranty If you received a KODA extended warranty when purchasing your new car the two year SKODA warranty for damages to your SKODA vehicle will be extended to your chosen duration or until the specified mileage limit has been reached which ever occurs first The previously mentioned paint warranty and the warranty against rust perfora tion are unaffected by the extended warranty Detailed conditions for the extended warranty are included in the extended war ranty terms and conditions which your SKODA Partner will have given to you upon purchasing your new car 6 Mobility warranty and SKODA extended warranty i Note The mobility warranty and optional SKODA extended warranty are only available for some countries COzin g km discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilo meter Groupe Sp cial Mobile a digital network of mobile devices for the transmission of voice and data Hydraulic brake assist HFP Hands free profile connection of a mobile device by means of TP femera pree enon TOME See er
112. SKODA warranty gt Repair of rust perforation to the bodywork of your vehicle that occurs within twelve years from the start of the warranty Only rust perforation of body sheets from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of rust perfo ration to bodywork and covered by the SKODA warranty The warranty starts on the date on which the original purchaser acquires the ve hicle upon purchasing it from the SKODA Partner or the date of first registration Whichever event occurs first and is recorded by the SKODA Partner in the service schedule accordingly is the one that applies Repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by restoring it Replaced parts become the property of the SKODA Service Partner There shall be no further claims arising from the SKODA warranty In particular there shall be no claims for replacement cancellation provision of a courtesy ve hicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages If your KODA vehicle was purchased from a KODA Partner in a country of the European Economic Area i e the countries of the European Union Norway Ice land and Liechtenstein or in Switzerland claims arising from the SKODA warranty must also be made through a SKODA Service Partner in one of these countries If your KODA vehicle was purchased from a KODA Partner outside the European Economic Area and Switzerland claims arising from the SKODA warranty must al so be made thro
113. Warning light Winter Windscreen washer system Windscreen wipers Windscreen wiper Replacing the front windscreen wiper blades __ Service position 186 180 185 175 180 184 180 175 177 176 176 181 179 178 176 179 176 176 176 178 181 50 155 38 165 165 20 165 165 49 195 195 Index 219 Windscreen wipers Activating 49 Replacing the rear window glass wiper blades _ 196 Windscreen washer fluid 165 Windscreen wipers and washers _ 48 Winter operation 180 Snow chains 181 Winter tyres 181 Winter tyres See Wheels 181 220 Index SKODA AUTO a s pursues a policy of constant product and model development We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time The information about appearance performances dimensions weight standards and functions of the vehicle is correct at the time of publication Some equipment might only be introduced at a later date or might only be offered in certain markets informa tion is provided by SKODA Partners It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data illustrations and descriptions contained in this Own er s Manual Reprinting reproduction translation or any other use either in whole or in part is not permitted without the written consent of SKODA AUTO a s SKODA AUTO a s expressly reserves all rights
114. a flat screwdriver with a maximum width of 5 mm and pull out the head restraint Seats and useful equipment 53 gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button audibly clicks into place E WARNING a The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident a Never drive with the head restraints removed risk of injury a f the rear seats are occupied the rear head restraint must not be in the lower position i Note For the sport seats the head restraints are integrated into the front seat backr ests These headrests cannot be adjusted by height or removed CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front seat heating 54 Front armrest 55 Reararmrest 5H Rear seat backrests 55 Front seat heating Fig 38 Heated front seats 54 Using the system AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 The seat backrests and seats can be heated electrically The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running Switching on gt Press the corresponding symbol button or amp Fig 38 Pressing once switches the seat heating on at its maximum level With repeated pressing of the switch the level of the seat heating is down regu lated up to the switch off The level of the seat heating is
115. accordance with the materi als defect liability unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement or any other agreements You should keep the approved warranty certificate and the in voices for these accessories for this period of time so that the commencement of the term can be verified SKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care products and all parts that are subject to natural wear and tear such as tyres batteries bulbs and wiper blades Note The accessories authorized by the company KODA AUTO a s will be offered by the KODA Partners in all countries where the company KODA AUTO a s has a sales and after sales service network This will usually be in the form of a printed catalogue of SKODA Genuine Accessories in the form of separate printed bro chures or in the form of SKODA Genuine Accessories on the SKODA Partner web sites Spoiler First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 149 If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid the following instructions must be adhered to gt For safety reasons the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compart ment lid gt This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own in combination with another spoiler not on the luggage
116. ailer 124 Anti theft alarm system 125 F warnine Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer Loading a trailer First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 123 The vehicle trailer combination must be balanced whereby the maximum permis sible drawbar load must be utilised If the drawbar load is too low it jeopardises the performance of the vehicle trailer combination Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible Secure the items from slipping The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trail er is laden Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a full load page 176 Service life of tyres Trailer load The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan ces page 207 Technical data The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1000 metres above mean sea level The engine output falls as altitude increases as does the vehicle s climbing pow er Therefore for every additional 1000 m in height or part the maximum per missible towed weight must be reduced by 10 The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer The trailer and drawbar
117. ait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough gt Open the bonnet gt Pull out the dipstick gt Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop gt Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Oil level within range A No oil must be refilled Oil level within range Oil can be refilled Afterwards the oil level can lie in the range A Inspecting and replenishing 167 Oil level within range The engine must be topped up with oil so that the oil level at least reaches the range B The engine consumes a little oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 I 1000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres The oil level must be checked at regular intervals We recommend after each time you refuel or prior to making a long journey We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A but not above if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motor way trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high moun tain pass If the oil level is too low this will be indicated by an indicator light in the instru ment cluster page 16 7 Engine Oil Check the oil level using the dipstick as soon as possible Add oil accordingly CAUTION The oil level must not exceed level A
118. ake fluid reservoir This chapter contains information on the following subjects Checking the brake fluid level 170 Changing 171 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir Fig 138 The level must be between the MIN and MAX markings 170 General Maintenance A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear and tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system however if the fluid lev el drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the MIN marking If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the indicator light page 15 Brake system lighting up in the instrument cluster Changing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 Brake fluid absorbs moisture Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake sys tem The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications gt VW 50714 gt FMVSS 116 DOT4 CO Introduction This chapter contains i
119. al precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system e g closing the windows and the sliding tilting roof etc If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts such as a spoiler roof rack system two way radio aerial etc it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand After an automatic wash with wax treatment the lips of the wipers should be cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose and then de greased FJ warnine Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system Washing with a high pressure cleaner First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 152 When washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material EJ warnine Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters CAUTION a f washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high pressure cleaner en sure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the door panel joints risk of freezing a To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high pressure cleaners o
120. alve The same also applies to the replacement valve core n 188 Do it yourself Preparations for using the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the breakdown kit gt Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible gt If you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal require ments must be observed gt Have all of the occupants get out of the vehicle While changing a tyre the oc cupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road they should instead remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the se lector lever on the automatic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit page 187 gt Uncouple any trailers gt Remove the breakdown kit from the boot gt Stick the sticker 2 Fig 154 on page 188 onto the dash panel in the driver s line of vision gt Do not remove the foreign body e g screw or nail from the tyre gt Unscrew the valve cap gt Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean sur face rag paper etc Sealing
121. and inflating the tyre First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 Sealing gt Forcefully shake the tyre inflater bottle 10 Fig 154 on page 188 back and forth several times gt Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clockwise direction The film on the cap is pierced automatically gt Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve gt Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre gt Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve gt Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 Inflating gt Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose 5 Fig 154 on page 188 firmly on to the tyre valve gt Check that the air release valve 7 is closed gt Start the engine and run it in idle gt Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket page 60 12 volt power outlet gt Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 gt Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved Max imum run time of 8 minutes M gt Switch off the air compressor gt If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve gt Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the s
122. and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 49 The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob Mechanically adjustable mirrors By moving the rotary knob in the direction of the arrow the mirror surface can be adjusted to the desired position Fig 34 A Electrically adjustable mirrors By moving the rotary knob in the direction of the arrow the mirror surface can be adjusted to the desired position Fig 34 B The knob can be moved into the following positions L Adjust the left mirror R Adjust the right mirror 0 Switch off mirror control a Mirror heater Folding in the exterior mirrors The whole exterior mirror can be manually folded towards the side windows To put it back into its original position it should be folded back from the side window until it audibly clicks into place Lights and visibility 51 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Adjusting the front seats 53 Head restraints 53 The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for the following gt Reaching the c
123. and safety warn ings H on page 184 Release gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction of the arrow Fig 150 Tightening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop Emergency equipment and self help 185 gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt against the direction of the ar row Fig 150 until it is tight EI WARNING Undo the wheel bolts only a little about one turn provided that the vehicle has not yet been jacked up Otherwise the wheel could come off and fall down risk of injury i Note If it proves difficult to undo the bolts carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foodt Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so and make sure you keep your footing Raising the vehicle Rigel Jacking points for positioning lifting jack Fig 152 Attach lifting jack 186 Do it yourself First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 184 Position the lifting jack below the jacking point closest to the faulty wheel Fig 151 The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in the lower sill gt Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up until its claw is positioned below the vertical web of the lower sill gt Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web Fig 152
124. arnine We advise you only to use KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle Reliability safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts can be purchased from SKODA Partners who will also perform the professional assembly of the purchased parts SA For the sake of the environment Technical documents regarding alterations carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers at a later date This ensures that the vehicle is recycled in an environmentally sound man ner Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty Vehicle care 149 Tests required by law First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability and roadwor thiness and or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle to be tested at specific inter vals These tests can be carried out by workshops or testing stations that have been legally authorized for this purpose The SKODA Service Partners are up to date on the legally required tests and will prepare the vehicle for the tests as part of a service operation if required or will be responsible for carrying out these tests The specialist garages can carry out
125. as senger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced Airbag system 137 Side airbags Fig 121 Location of the side airbag in the driver s seat gas filled side airbag Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 136 In the event of severe side collisions the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body chest stomach and pelvis of passengers in the ve hicle The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the front seat backr ests Fig 121 A When the side airbags Fig 121 B are deployed the head airbag and belt ten sioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated air bag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pelvis is reduced on the side facing the door EI warnine Observe the following instructions for the correct seated position a Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This ap plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat page 144 Child safety and side airbag 138 Safety BE WARNING Continued There must not be any further persons animals as well as objects po
126. ats Heating and air conditioning Heating rear window HHC Hill Hold Control HHC Hooks Horn 47 79 54 76 47 112 112 66 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA Ice scraper Ice warning Ignition Immobiliser 112 155 23 98 98 14 Indicator lights Individual settings Locking Unlocking Inertia reels Information system Compass point display Door warning Gear recommendation Ice warning MAXI DOT display Multifunction display Operation Service interval display 34 34 133 22 24 24 24 23 27 25 22 28 Instrument cluster 10 Counter for distance driven 12 Display TI Fuel gauge 12 Indicator lights 14 Overview 10 Revolution counter 1 Speedometer 11 Temperature gauge T Interior monitor 36 ISOFIX 145 J Jack 183 Jacking points Raise vehicle 186 Jump starting 189 190 K Key Locking 32 Starting the engine 98 Unlocking 32 L Lever Main beam 43 Turn signal 43 Windscreen wipers 49 Light Daytime running lights 42 Fog lights with CORNER function 43 Parking light 45 Replacing bulbs 200 Light bulbs Rear light Rapid 204 Lighting Luggage compartment 64 Index 215 Lights 41 Beam range adjustment 4 Cockpit 45 Fog lights 43 Hazard warning light system 44
127. attery supplying power B gt Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach the clamp 4 to a solid metal component firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself Starting engine gt Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle gt Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery gt If the engine does not start halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 sec onds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process gt Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described above Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the dis charged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and in sulated terminal clamps Observe the instructions of the jumper lead manufactur er Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases is red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases is black Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Wp J Ss E i a i f ae Fig 156 Engine earth START STOP system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 189 On vehicles with the START STOP system the jump start cable of the charger must n
128. b insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in the oppo site direction to that of the arrow as far as it goes gt Insert the rubber cover 2 Removing replacing the bulb for the parking light gt Remove the rubber cover 2 or 5 Fig 170 on page 201 gt Remove the bulb holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 172 gt Remove the faulty bulb from the bulb holder Bj in the direction of the arrow gt Insert a new bulb in the bulb holder up to the stop gt Replace the bulb holder in the headlamp with the bulb gt Insert the rubber cover 2 202 Do it yourself Changing the front turn signal bulb Fig 173 Principle sketch Headlight with halogen bulb headlight with xenon bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 gt Turn the socket with the bulb Fig 173 as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow and then remove it gt Remove the bulb insert the socket with the new bulb and turn in the opposite direction to that of the arrow to the stop Replacing the bulb for the fog light Fig 175 Replacing the light bulb BNH 0062 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Removing the protective grille gt Undo the protective grille in the area of the arrow Fig 174 A using the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 183 Vehicle tool
129. bbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check gt Black colour electrolyte level is correct gt Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engine start We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist ga rage especially in the following cases gt High external temperatures gt Longer day trips gt After each charge Winter time The vehicle battery only has a proportion of the starting power in lower tempera tures A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be low 0 C We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and if necessary re charged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter CAUTION For technical reasons on vehicles with the description AGM the electrolyte lev el cannot be checked C Note The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the inspection service Charging First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine gt Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components gt Only when per
130. behind the trailer with the standard rear view mirrors The national legal requirements must be observed Headlights The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being towed and the head lights may dazzle other road users Adjust the headlights using the headlight beam control page 41 124 Driving Driving speed For safety reasons do not drive faster than 80 km h when towing a trailer Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trail er is detected Never attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by accelerating Brakes Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake Engine overheating If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right hand area or the red area of the scale the speed must be reduced immediately Stop and switch off the engine if the indicator light in the instrument cluster Starts to flash page 16 Wait a few minutes and check the level of cool ant page 169 The following guidelines must be observed page 16 The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating EI warnine a Never use the safety eyelet for towing Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface an
131. breaks on long journeys at least every two hours CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Correct seated position for the driver 128 Correct seated position for the front passenger 128 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 128 Examples of incorrect seated positions 129 EJ warnine General information The front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers a f the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag a If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt a The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving as this will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury FJ warninec Information for the driver a Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is mov ing a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to
132. bserve the introductory information given on page 104 New brake pads do not initially provide optimal braking performance They first need to be run in Therefore drive with special care for the first 200 km or so CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Looking ahead __ 0 Economical gear changing 106 Avoiding full throttle 106 Reducing idling _ 106 Avoiding short distances 107 Checking tyre inflation pressure 107 Avoiding unnecessary ballast 07 Regular maintenance 107 Saving electrical energy 108 Environmental compatibility C108 The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the ve hicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works SKODA places a partic ular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness Fuel consumption environmental pollution and the wear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors gt your personal driving style gt operating conditions gt technical requirements The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 15 by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver s control Cons
133. bserve the introductory information given on page 136 In the event of a severe side collision the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides of the vehicle in terior Fig 122 A In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the rele vant side airbag and the front seat belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the accident occurs When deployed the airbag covers the window area of the front and rear doors as well as the area of the door pillar Fig 122 B Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag The reduc tion in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area MIA gt 4 4 FJ wAaRNING a There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth ing Additionally clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items of cloth ing a The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head air bags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deploye
134. by pressing the symbol button A C Under certain conditions recirculated air mode page 81 may switch on automatically the indicator light will then light up in the symbol button lt We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 77 on page 76 in the open position in all operating modes Recirculated air mode First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 79 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle e g when driving through a tunnel or in a traffic jam Switching on off gt Press the symbol button lt The indicator light in the button lights up gt Press the symbol button lt again The indicator light in the button goes out Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control Fig 79 on page 80 is turned to position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this position by repeatedly pressing the symbol button FJ warninec Never leave recirculated air mode switched on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause driver and passenger fatigue reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up Increased risk of accident Switch off recir culated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Heating and air conditioning 81 AI Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control e
135. c gearbox Selector lever emergency unlocking 195 Starting off and driving 103 Tiptronic 103 Automatic load deactivation 174 Automatic transmission 101 Kickdown 104 Malfunction 104 Selector lever lock 103 Using the selector lever 102 AUX 95 Avoiding damage to the vehicle Driving through water 109 Avoiding damage to your vehicle Ball head Check fitting Fitting Ready position Removing Battery In the remote control key Belts Belt tensioners Bonnet Closing Opening Boot Class N1 vehicles Double sided floor covering 109 121 121 120 122 193 130 133 164 164 65 70 Flexible storage compartment Hooks Meshed pocket for storage 66 70 See Boot lid Storage compartments in the boot Boot cover Parking position Boot lid Automatic locking Closing Opening Brake booster Brake fluid Changing Checking Information messages 69 68 38 38 38 100 170 171 170 15 Brakes Brake assist systems 11 Brake booster Brake fluid Handbrake 100 170 100 Indicator light 15 Running in 105 Braking Information on braking 100 Breakdown kit 188 Bulb failure Indicator light 18 Bulbs Indicator light 18 Replacing 200 Tail lamp Rapid Spaceback 205 Button in the driver s door Electrical power wi
136. ce becomes due then the following information is displayed for about 10 seconds Fig 10 gt The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A gt The symbol and the number of days remaining until the next service interval are displayed in position B gt The symbol and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service in terval are displayed in position C As soon as the due date for the service has been reached the flashing icon and the message OIL CHNG or INSPEC_ appear in the display for about 20 sec onds after the ignition has been switched on Display the days and distance until the next service interval Press button 5 Fig 2 on page 10continuously at any time when the ignition is switched on to display the remaining distance and days until the next service in terval Information on the oil change service is displayed at first followed by information on the inspection when button 5 is pressed again gt The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position A gt The symbol and the number of days remaining until the next service interval are displayed in position B gt The symbol and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service in terval are displayed in position C Prompt in the MAXI DOT display Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 28 Oil change service If an oil change service is due the following message appears Oil change in km
137. ce command is not detected the system answers with Sorry and a new entry can be completed After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid After the 3rd error the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended 92 Using the system Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag Record menu item Your own voice entry can also be saved using the voice control in the menu FUR THER OPTIONS CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Music playback via Bluetooth 92 Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel Version 1 93 Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel Version 2 94 AUX and MDI inputs 95 Music playback via Bluetooth AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 92 The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II makes it possible to play back mu sic via Bluetooth from the devices such as MP3 player mobile phone or note book To ensure that music can be played via Bluetooth you must first pair the device with the hands free system in the Phone Bluetooth Media player menu The music playback process is performed on the connected device The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the mus
138. changing Driving through water E Economical and environmentally friendly driving Economical driving Ballast Driving at full throttle Idling 214 Index 194 194 70 T10 109 207 207 209 106 109 105 107 106 106 Looking ahead 106 Regular maintenance 107 Saving energy 108 Short distances 107 Tyre inflation pressure 107 EDL 112 Electrical power windows Button in the driver s door 38 39 Button in the rear door 39 Electronic Differential Lock EDL 112 Electronic immobiliser 98 Electronic Stability Control ESC 111 Emergency Changing a wheel 184 Door locking 194 Hazard warning light system 44 jump starting 190 Jump starting 189 Selector lever unlocking 195 Towing the using the tow hitch 192 Towing the vehicle 191 Tyre repair 187 Unlocking the tailgate 194 Emergency equipment Fire extinguisher 183 First aid kit 182 Jack 183 Vehicle tool kit 183 Warning triangle 182 Emissions 207 Engine Running in 104 Switching off the engine 99 Engine compartment 162 Brake fluid 170 Coolant 169 Overview 165 Vehicle battery 171 Engine oil 166 Capacity 167 Changing 168 Checking 167 Indicator light 16 Information messages 16 Replenishing 168 Specifications 167 Environment 105 Environmental compatibility 108 Environmentally friendly drivi
139. cialist ga rage immediately Airbagsystem 141 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 143 Child safety and side airbag 144 Classification of child seats 144 Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 144 I WARNING Continued a Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehi cle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the air bag system is deployed a Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fittings The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat In contrast to adults the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory pro
140. circulated air mode for the air condi tioning system page 81 or for Climatronic page 83 EI warnine For your own safety and that of other road users ensure that all the windows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to cor rectly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to demist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode CAUTION The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free from ice snow or leaves for example to ensure that the heating and cooling system works properly a After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air con ditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is not a leak 76 Using the system i Note a The used air escapes through the vents at the back of the boot a We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the in terior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys tem This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is oper ating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense re placement of compressor Air outlets BNH 0245 Fig 77 Air outlet vents First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 76 Warmed unwarmed or cooled air flows out of the air outlet vents de
141. cognize any combination of connected numbers e g twenty three Switching on voice control Briefly press the button 1 Fig 83 on the multifunction steering wheel Switching off voice control If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently being played must be terminated by briefly pressing button 1 Fig 83 on the multi function steering wheel If the system is expecting a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by briefly pressing the button 1 Fig 83 on the multifunction steering wheel Fp Note a The dialogue is immediately terminated in the event of an incoming call a The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction steering wheel with telephone control Dialogue version 2 Fig 84 Multifunction steering wheel Voice control BNH 0202 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 90 The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to carry them out is called dialogue The system gives audible feedback and guides you through the relevant functions if necessary Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors gt Speak at a normal volume without intonation or excessive pauses gt Avoid poor pronunciation gt Close the doors windows and sliding roof in order to reduce or eliminate dis turbing noise from outsid
142. colouration to seat covers even when used correctly This applies particularly to light coloured seat covers This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Note When using the vehicle minor visible changes may occur to the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress applied to the covers Artificial leather cloths and Alcantara First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 157 Artificial leather Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather use a mild soap sol ution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose Fabric Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors boot cover etc using specific cleaning agents e g dry foam Use a soft sponge brush or commercially available microfibre cloth Use a cloth and a cleaning agent specifically designed for this purpose to clean the roof trim Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush Remove stubborn hair using a cleaning glove Alcantara Dust and fine dirt particles in pores creases and seams may chafe and damage the surface If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the Al cantara seat covers from the direct rays of the sun to prevent fading Minor changes in colour ca
143. compartment lid or in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid gt We recommend that you consult the SKODA Service Partner for any repairs to or replacement addition or removal of spoilers FI WARNING If work on your vehicle s spoilers is not carried out properly this can lead to operational faults risk of accident and serious injuries Airbags First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front bump er doors front seats roof lining or body F WARNING Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Modifications repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults and can also seri ously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system risk of accident and fatal injury a The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed Airbag modules cannot be repaired Vehicle care 151 EJ warninec Observe the following instructions for handling the airbag system a It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed a Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been rem
144. congestion a The vehicle has broken down Perkin Oe eat take cnet 77 s Switch the reading light on off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn If light operation with the door contact switch is enabled the light will come on ings H on page 41 when one of the following events occurs gt The vehicle is unlocked gt One of the doors is opened gt The ignition key is removed Parking light P switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Place the control lever into position A or B as far as it can go Fig 22 on page 43 the parking light on the right left hand side of the vehicle is switched If light operation with the door contact switch is enabled the light will go off on when one of the following events occurs gt The vehicle is locked gt The ignition is switched on gt About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed i Note i Note The parking light P can only be activated if the ignition is switched off a f the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off the parking light is not automatically switched on a On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display the symbol xe in the light switch also lights up when the two sided parking light is switched on a Switching on the side light on both sides gt Turn the light switch A to position Fig 21 on page 41 and lock the vehicle If the interior light remain
145. console Fig 45 Storage compartment front rear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 Explanation of graphic Fig 45 A Open storage compartment at the front of the centre console Open storage compartment at the rear of the centre console Cup holders Fig 46 Cup holder front rear 58 Using the system Fig 47 Rear armrest Cup holder k BNH 0200 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder Explanation of graphic Fig 46 A Cup holder in front centre console Cup holder in rear centre console Explanation of graphic Fig 47 Removable element D Removable element The size of the individual openings can be altered using the removable elements and D Fig 47 F WARNING a Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder If the vehicle moves they may spill risk of scalding a Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey There is a risk of spilling e g when braking which may cause damage to the elec trical components or seat upholstery Cigarette lighter Fig 48 Cigarette lighter _ ees BNH 0229 First read and observe the introducto
146. contain all of the equipment com ponents described in this Owner s Manual The level of equipment in your vehicle refers to your purchase contract for the ve hicle More information is available from the SKODA Partner from whom you bought the vehicle The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only inten ded for general information Materials defect liability and SKODA warranty for new Cars Mobility warranty and SKODA extended warranty Abbreviations Using the system Cockpit Overview Instruments and Indicator Lights Instrument cluster Indicator lights Information system Driver information system Multifunction display MFD MAXI DOT display Service interval display Unlocking and opening Unlocking and locking Anti theft alarm system Luggage compartment lid Electrical power windows Lights and visibility Lights Interior lighting Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear mirror 10 10 14 22 22 25 27 28 31 31 36 37 38 4 4 45 46 48 Seats and useful equipment Heating and air conditioning Communication and multimedia Starting off and Driving Assist systems Adjusting the seats Seat features Practical equipment Luggage compartment Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment Rapid Spaceback Roof rack system Heating
147. coupled or uncou pled page 36 Conditions for including a trailer in the anti theft alarm system v The vehicle is factory fitted with an anti theft alarm system and towing de vice vV The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer sock et v The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional V The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti theft alarm system is activated Note For technical reasons trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the an ti theft alarm system Towing a trailer 125 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Safety equipment _ 2G Before setting off 126 What influences the driving safety 127 In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with for exam ple regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children EI WARNING a This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants a You can find further information on safety concerning you and those travel ling with you in the following chapters of this owner s manual a The complete on board literature should always be in the vehicle This ap plies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle 1 Not valid for sports seat 1
148. d The audible warning signal is switched off after a few seconds or as a result of door contact when the driver s door is closed However the side lights remain on to illuminate the parked vehicle if necessary a If leaving the vehicle without needing the parking lights on always turn the light switch to position 0 Daytime running lights DAY LIGHT First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 The daytime running lights function provides the lighting of the front of the vehi cle Switching on daytime running lights gt Turn the light switch Fig 21 on page 41 to position 0 Deactivating the daylight driving lights function gt Deactivate the daylight driving lights by removing the fuse for the daylight driv ing lights page 197 Fuses in the dash panel 42 Using the system Activating the daylight driving lights function gt Activate the daylight driving lights by inserting the fuse with the appropriate amperage for the daylight driving lights page 197 Fuses in the dash panel Deactivating daytime running lights on vehicles with the START STOP system gt Switch off the ignition gt Pull the turn signal lever Fig 22 on page 43 towards the steering wheel while simultaneously pushing it downwards and hold it in this position gt Switch on the ignition wait until the left turn signal light flashes 4x gt Switch off the ignition an audible signal sounds which co
149. d When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the accessories fitted could be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants page 149 a The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de ployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed There must no other persons e g children or animals between the passen ger and the deployment area of the head airbag In addition none of the occu pants should lean their head out of the window when driving or extend their arms and hands out of the window i Note In vehicles with head airbags the word AIRBAG can be seen on the B column cladding CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Deactivating airbags 140 Deactivating the front passenger airbag __ CSCS C O Airbag system 139 Deactivating airbags Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 139 Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below gt If using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat due to different le gal regulations the airbag must be deactivated if using a forwards facing child seat in some countries page 142 Transporting children safely gt If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle
150. d corrodes dental enamel and if it comes into contact with the skin causes deep wounds that take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers slin cracks a If any battery acid comes into contact with your eyes rinse the affected eye immediately with clean water for several minutes and consult a doctor imme diately Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water If you swallow battery acid consult a doctor immediately Inspecting and replenishing 171 EI WARNING a t is prohibited to work with naked flames or lights a t is prohibited to smoke or carry out any activities that produce sparks a Never use a damaged vehicle battery risk of explosion a Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery risk of explosion and chemical burns Replace a frozen vehicle battery a Never jump start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels risk of ex plosion and chemical burns EI WARNING a When you charge a battery hydrogen is released and a highly explosive gas mixture is also produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on a Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery e g with a metal object or cable creates a short circuit risk of melting the lead bars and risk of ex plosion
151. d firm a surface as possible The following instructions must be followed if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres or rims that differ from the factory fitted ones page 177 New tyres 184 Do it yourself EI warnine Observe the following instructions for lifting the vehicle a f the wheel has to be changed on a slope first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away a Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent pos sible moving A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack causing the vehicle to fall down It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones tiled floor etc a Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur pose a Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed a Never position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack a Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised risk of injury CAUTION a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm a f the wheel bolts are fastened too tightly this can cause damage to the anti theft wheel bolt or the adapter Note The national
152. d manually Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connec tion is completed by inputting a PIN number If the authorisation input is required it must always be performed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection 2 Ww 88 Using the system The following steps must be carried out for pairing gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the Phone New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until the hands free system has completed the search gt Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If the hands free system announces as standard SKODA_BT on the display of the mobile phone enter the PIN within 30 seconds and wait until the connec tion is established gt To finish pairing in the MAXI DOT display confirm the creation of the new user profile If there is no free space available to create a new user profile delete an existing user profile During the connecting procedure no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands free system Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands free system whereby on ly one mobile phone can communicate with the hands free system The visibility of the hands free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes af ter the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated w
153. d the filler cap with your hand and unlock by turning the key in the direction of the arrow Fig 131 B gt Unscrew the filler cap in the direction of the arrow Fig 131 c gt Place the filler cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap Fig 131 D gt Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go When the pump nozzle shuts off for the first time the fuel tank is full gt Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the pump gt Screw in the filler cap in the opposite direction of the arrow Fig 131 B until it audibly clicks into place gt Hold the filler cap with one hand lock it by turning in the opposite direction of the arrow Fig 131 D and remove the key gt Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly Vehicles with lockable fuel filler flap gt Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 131 gt Open the flap manually in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Unscrew the filler cap in the direction of the arrow Fig 131 c gt Remove the filler cap and place the it into the hole on the fuel filler flap Fig 131 D gt Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off
154. d to the traffic sit uation Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer and cause functional faults to the vehicle s entire electrical system as well as acci dents and severe injuries a Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist garages a Never directly connect the trailer s electrical system with the electrical con nections for the tail lights or other current sources Note a After coupling the trailer and connecting the power socket check that the rear lights on the trailer are working correctly a f there is an error in the trailer lighting check the fuses in the fuse box in the dash panel page 197 a Contact between the breakaway cable and the safety eyelet can result in me chanical wear on the surface protection of the eyelet Such wear does not impair the functioning of the safety eyelet and does not constitute a fault It is excluded from the warranty coverage a f you tow a trailer frequently you should also have your vehicle inspected be tween service intervals a The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and un coupling the trailer Anti theft alarm system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 123 When the vehicle is locked the alarm is activated when the electrical connection to the trailer is interrupted Always switch off the anti theft alarm system before a trailer is
155. djustment mechanism of the backrest angle sult of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention a The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving as this will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle a Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Children must be fastened page 142 Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system The front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects de signed for this purpose e g child seats risk of accident 52 Using the system Adjusting the front seats Fig 36 Adjusting the seat BNH 0223 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 52 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Pull lever A Fig 35 in the centre in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 36 and push the seat in the required direction The lock must click into place after you release the lever Adjusting height of seat gt Push or pull lever B Fig 35 in the direction of one of the arrows 2 Fig 36 again Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Rem
156. dling properties winter tyres must be fit ted on all four wheels the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyres must be no older than 4 years Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Winter tyres page 28 SA For the sake of the environment Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling prop erties a shorter braking distance less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 C The fuel consumption is also lower Snow chains AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 180 When driving in wintry road conditions snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels For technical reasons it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel tyre combinations Wheel size 5J x 147 6J x 15 6J x 15 Depth D Tyre size 175 70 185 60 195 55 a Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm b Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 13 mm CAUTION a The chains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow They ad
157. down in the desired direc tion Fig 118 gt Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has cor rectly locked in place CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Inertia reels 133 Belt tensioners 133 Inertia reels Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 133 Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel When pulling slowly on the seat belt the belt can move freely When pulling sharply on the seat belt the movement is locked by the inertia reel The belts also lock when full braking when the car accelerates when driving downhill and when cornering EJ warnine If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it have it inspected im mediately by a specialist garage Belt tensioners Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 133 Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three point seat belts The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The fastened three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor fronta
158. driving The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention Starting off and Driving 107 A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal Check the oil level at regular intervals e g when filling up Oil consumption is de pendent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil con sumption could be as high as 0 5 litres 1 000 km depending on your style of driv ing It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first and rea ches its lowest level only after a certain running in time The oil consumption of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5 000 km SA For the sake of the environment Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthetic high lubricity oils a Regularly check the ground under the vehicle Have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the ground Note We recommend that your vehicle be serviced on a regular basis by a SKODA serv ice partner Saving electrical energy First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 When the engine is running the alternator generates and supplies electrical pow er If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on more fuel is needed to operate the alternator We t
159. ductory information and safety warn ings J on page 175 Only use radial tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and tread pat tern on one axle on all four wheels The tyre wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents Where possible replace tyres by axle Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels Explanation of tyre markings 195 55 R 15 85H What this means is Tyre width in mm Fig 141 on page 176 B Height width ratio in Fig 141 on page 176 B Code letter for the type of tyre Radial Fig 141 on page 176 Rim diameter in inches Fig 141 on page 176 B Load index Speed symbol H The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall possibly on the inside e g DOT 10 13 means for example that the tyre was manufactured in the 10th week of 2013 Load index This indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual tyre 83 487kg 84 500kg 85 515kg 86 530kg Wheels 177 87 545kg 91 615 kg 92 630kg 93 650kg 95 690kg Speed symbol This indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed with fitted tyres in each category R 170km h S 180km h T 190 km h U 200km h H 210 km h V 240 km h WwW 270 km h CAUTION The information about the load index and the speed symbol is listed in your vehi cle documents Unidirect
160. ductory information and safety warn ings H on page 195 Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade put the windscreen wiper arms into the service position Service position for changing wiper blades gt Closing the bonnet gt Switch the ignition off and on again gt Press the windscreen wiper lever into position 4 Fig 32 on page 49 and the windscreen wiper arms will move into the service position Removing the wiper blade gt Raise the windscreen wiper arm from the rear window and slightly tilt the wind screen wiper blade towards the wiper arm arrow 1 Fig 163 gt Hold the windscreen wiper arm at the top end gt Press the locking button A and remove the wiper blade in the direction of ar row 2 Attaching the windscreen wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place gt Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen gt Switch on the ignition and push the windscreen wiper lever into position 4 Fig 32 on page 49 the windscreen wiper arms move to the home position Emergency equipment and self help 195 Replacing the rear window glass wiper blades Fig 164 Rear window wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 195 Removing the wiper blade gt Raise the windscreen wiper arm from the rear window and slightly tilt th
161. ductory information given on page 54 Setting the height gt Lift the armrest fully upwards in the direction of the arrow Fig 39 and then move it back down completely gt Move the armrest into one of the 5 locking positions The armrest includes a storage compartment page 62 Rear armrest N lt Fig 40 Fold the armrest forward BNH 0226 1 Ifthe front seats are too far back we recommend that you have the rear head restraints removed before the seat backrests are folded forward Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 Folding forward gt Pull on the loop A Fig 40 and fold the armrest forward in the direction of the arrow A cup holder may be located in the armrest page 58 Rear seat backrests j IBNH 0189 Fig 41 Opening for inserting the belt tongue Rapid Rapid Space Back Fold back seat rest forward Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backrests forward The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats Folding forward Before folding the rear seats forwards adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded rear seat backrests gt Put the belt tongue into the opening
162. ducts whatsoever CAUTION Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coating and driving noise may occur Chrome parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 153 First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If this method does not completely clean chrome parts use a specific chrome care product CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment risk of surface scratches Decorative films First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean warm water Never use harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents as this could damage the films The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner gt The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be 50 cm gt Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface gt The maximum water temperature is 50 C gt The maximum water pressure is 80 bar CAUTION In the winter months do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from the areas with films Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of snow or ice risk of film damage Windows and exterior mirrors Fig 130 Fuel filler flap Ice scraper BNH 0173 First read and observe the introductory information a
163. dure takes place Assist systems 117 Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 116 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Start the engine manually START MANUALLY The driver sees this message when the conditions for the automatic start proce dure are not met during the STOP phase The engine must be started manually O Error start stop system ERROR START STOP Error in the START STOP system Seek help from a specialist garage 118 Driving This chapter contains information on the following subjects Description 119 Adjusting the ready position 120 Fitting the ball head 121 Check proper fitting 121 Removing the ball head 122 Use and care 122 If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with a towing device or is fitted with a towing device from SKODA Original Accessories then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal regulations for towing a trailer Your vehicle is fitted with a 13 pin power socket for the electrical connection be tween the vehicle and trailer If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7 pin connec tor you can use a Suitable adapter from SKODA Original Accessories The maximum trailer drawbar load is 50 kg EJ warninec a Check that the tow bar is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting recess before the start of every journey Do n
164. e gt It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise gt During the dialogue limit background noise in the vehicle e g passengers talk ing at the same time gt Do not speak when the system is making an announcement The microphone for voice control is housed in the moulded headliner and directed towards the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front pas senger can operate the equipment Entering a phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous sequence of numbers spo ken one after the other the whole number at once or in the form of digit blocks separated by short pauses After each string of digits separated by a brief pause in speaking all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system The digits 0 9 and symbols are permitted The system does not recognize any combination of connected numbers e g twenty three Switching on voice control Briefly press the button 1 Fig 84 on the multifunction steering wheel Switching off voice control If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently being played must be terminated by briefly pressing button 1 Fig 84 on the multi function steering wheel If the system is expecting a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by briefly pressing the button 1
165. e A Fig 75 gt Lift the variable loading floor in the direction of the arrow 1 until the folding corners B lock into place in area C Folding down gt Push the folding corners B Fig 75 on both sides of the variable loading floor in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove these from positions C gt Grasp the variable loading floor in the middle or at handle A gt Fold down the variable loading floor in the direction of arrow 3 EJ warnine The variable loading floor in the parking position restricts the driver s view at the back Seats and useful equipment 73 CAUTION a The variable loading floor can only be set to the parking position when in the lower position a f the variable loading floor is in the parking position the parking position on the luggage compartment cover cannot be set page 68 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points 74 Roof load 75 EJ warnine The transported items on the roof rack must be securely attached risk of accident a Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps a Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system a When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on the roof rack system handling of the car may change as a result of the dis placement of the centre of gravity The style of driving a
166. e and check the level of the engine oil page 167 Even if the oil level is correct do not drive any further if the warning light is flashing Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed Seek help from a specialist garage The warning light lights up yellow oil quantity too low The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Check oil level Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 167 The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds If no engine oil has been replenished the warning light will come on again after driving about 100 km The warning light flashes yellow engine oil level sensor faulty The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Oil sensor Workshop 1 Applies to vehicles with a segment display 16 Using the system If the engine oil level sensor is faulty the warning light flashes several times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately EI WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so E Coolant First read and observe the introductory in
167. e recommended gear page 24 Gear recommendation Sensible gear selection can have an effect on fuel consumption Fig 96 106 Driving Automatic gearbox gt Slowly apply the accelerator pedal However do not depress it to the kick down position page 104 gt An economic driving programme is automatically selected if the accelerator ped al is only depressed slowly Avoiding full throttle 1 100 km Fig 97 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km and speed in km h km h O 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Driving more slowly saves fuel Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consump tion but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear on your vehi cle The maximum speed of your vehicle should ideally never be used Fuel consump tion pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds The Fig 97 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to speed Fuel consumption will be halved if you drive at only three quarters of the possible top speed of your ve hicle Reducing idling First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Idling also costs fuel In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system turn off the engine when in a traffic jam at a level crossing or traffic lights wi
168. e 200 Headlight with halogen bulb 1 Low beam 2 Main beam separate daytime running lights and parking light 3 Turn signal light at the front Headlights with Xenon light 4 Low beam with Xenon light 5 Main beam separate daytime running lights and parking light 6 Turn signal light at the front Replacing the low beam bulb Fig 171 Headlight with halogen bulb Bulb for low beam BNH 0059 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 200 gt Remove the rubber cover 1 Fig 170 on page 201 gt Remove the connector with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the ar row Fig 171 gt Remove the connector gt Insert a new light bulb in such a way that the fixing lugs of the bulb fit in the recesses of the reflector gt Attach the connector gt Insert the rubber cover 1 Fig 170 on page 201 Fuses and light bulbs 201 Replacing bulb for main beam daytime running lights and parking light BNH 0188 Fig 172 Bulbs for main beam daytime running lights and parking light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Removing replacing the bulb for main beam and separate daytime running lights gt Remove the rubber cover 2 or 5 Fig 170 on page 201 gt Turn the bulb holder A Fig 172 as far as it goes in the direction of the arrow and remove it gt Replace the bul
169. e at a safe dis 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning notes must be followed at all times when working in the engine com partment page 162 Engine compartment Handbrake First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light comes on if the handbrake is applied An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km h for at least 3 seconds while the handbrake is applied The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Release parking brake Brake system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light illuminates if the brake fluid level in the braking system is too low or there is a fault in the ABS The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Brake fluid Log book Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the brake flu id page 170 FJ WARNING a If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 Th
170. e blows again after a short time have the electrical sys tem checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage mig Note a We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle A box of re placement fuses can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse There can be several consumer devices for one fuse depending on the vehicle s equipment a Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device a Multiple power consuming devices can share a single fuse Fuses in the dash panel Fig 165 Underside of the dash panel Distribution board cover First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 197 The fuses are located on the bottom left of the dash panel behind a cover Replacing fuses gt Remove the cover of the fuse box Fig 165 in the direction of the arrow gt Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover in the dash panel gt Place the clip on the respective fuse and pull this fuse out gt Insert a new fuse Fuses and light bulbs 197 gt Reinsert the cover into the dash panel in the opposite direction to the arrow such that the guide pins are guided into the dash panel openings Carefully push the cover in Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel
171. e child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat pay attention to any relevant national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats Fig 120 Safe distance to steering wheel inflated airbags g WARNING General Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 136 The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not have stickers attached be covered or modi fied in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects such as cup holders mobile phone mounts etc must be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity a Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel In the event of a severe frontal collision the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger gt The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig 119 The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the storage compartment Fig 119 B When the airbags are deployed they inflate in front of the driver and front pas senger Fig 120 D The forward movement of the driver and of the front p
172. e to engine parts can occur We recommend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage a Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults CAUTION a Your vehicle cannot be operated with biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system a Do not mix any fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar agents into the diesel This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine or the exhaust system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening and closing the bonnet 164 Engine compartment overview 165 Radiatorfan BS Windscreen washer system 165 EJ warnine Injuries or scolding or risks of accident or fire may occur when working in the engine compartment For this reason it is essential to comply with the warn ing instructions outlined below and with the general applicable safety rules The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area EJ warnine The following instructions must be followed before starting work in the en gine compartment Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key a Firmly apply the handbrake a f the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever into Neutral or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox move the selec tor lever into positi
173. e vehicle at the end of the winter EI warnine a When washing your vehicle in the winter Water and ice in the braking sys tem can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off risk of accident CAUTION Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight risk of paint damage SA For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose Washing by hand First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 152 Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge a washing glove or a washing brush Work from the top to the bottom starting with the roof Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a second sponge for such areas Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leath er CAUTION a When washing the car by hand protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts e g when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims etc There is a risk of cuts a Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle s paintwork Automatic car wash systems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 152 The usu
174. e warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so a The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level page 162 Engine compartment a If the warning light is displayed simultaneously with warning light page 18 Antilock brake system ABS do not continue your jour ney Seek help from a specialist garage a A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle s braking distance risk of accident A Seat belt warning light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light 4 comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt The indicator light 4 goes out if the driver or front passenger has fastened their seat belt If the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km h the indicator light 4 flashes and you will hear an acoustic Signal If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90 seconds the warning signal is deactivated and the indicator light A lights up permanently t Generator First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up amp when the engine is running the vehicle battery is not bein
175. e which you adopt during the first approx 1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in period On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox at the very latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached Observe the recommended gear page 24 Gear recommendation Very high engine speeds when accelerating accelerator are automatically restricted M In vehicles with manual transmission do not drive at unnecessarily low engine speeds Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly Ob serve the recommended gear page 24 Gear recommendation CAUTION The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting down at the wrong time This can result in a sudden increase in revs beyond the permissible maximum rpm thereby causing engine damage Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in in dividual gears SA For the sake of the environment Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds Shifting up sooner helps save fuel reduces engine noise and protects the environment New tyres Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 104 New tyres must firstly be run in as they do not offer optimal grip at first There fore drive with special care for the first 500 km or so New brake pads AA First read and o
176. e wind screen wiper blade towards the wiper arm arrow 1 Fig 164 gt Hold the windscreen wiper arm at the top end gt wel locking button A and remove the wiper blade in the direction of ar row Attaching the windscreen wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place gt Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen 196 Do it yourself CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fuses in the dash panel 197 Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel 198 Fuses in the engine compartment 199 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 200 Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses Switch off the ignition and the corresponding power consuming device before re placing a fuse Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operating page 198 or page 200 Fuse colour Maximum amperage light brown dark brown red blue yellow white green orange FJ warninec Always read and observe the warning notes before completing any work in the engine compartment page 162 Engine compartment CAUTION a Never repair fuses and do not replace them with fuses of a higher amperage risk of fire This may also cause damage at other points in the electrical system a If a newly inserted fus
177. each the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended for long term use EI WARNING a Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged a f the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the fit ted tyres never drive faster than 80 km h or 50 mph a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering CAUTION Observe the instructions on the warning sign of the temporary spare wheel Wheels 179 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 Extracting gt Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the wheel trim gt Push the wheel wrench through the clamp support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim Installing gt Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening gt Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks cor rectly in place CAUTION Use the pressure of your hand only do not strike the full wheel trim Avoid heavy impacts when the trim has not yet been inserted into the wheel rim This could cause damage to the guide and centring elements of the trim a When using the anti theft wheel bolt ensure that it is in the hole in the valve area page 186 Securing wheels against theft a f wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air is assured to cool the brake system Fig 145 Remove the cap
178. ealing agent to distribute in the tyre gt Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process gt If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit H gt Switch off the air compressor gt Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved continue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes page 189 EJ warninec The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is being inflated there is a risk of injury Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flammable materials there is a risk of fire a If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sus tained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not drive the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest there is a risk of overheating Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switch ing it on again Check after 10 minutes driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving
179. earbox Headlight cleaning system Low beam on the left Low beam on the right Fuses in the engine compartment Fig 167 Vehicle battery Cover for the fuse box variant 1 ULL BNH 0220 Fig 168 Vehicle battery Cover for the fuse box variant 2 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 197 Replacing fuses gt Press the lock buttons on the cover together simultaneously in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 167 or Fig 168 gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Replace the appropriate fuse gt Place the cover on top of the fuse box gt Push in the interlocks on the cover and lock The cover must engage firmly Fuses and light bulbs 199 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment Fig 169 Schematic representation of fuse box in engine compartment Ver sion 1 version 2 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 197 Power consumer Generator Not assigned version 1 auxiliary electric heater version 2 Interior version 1 Fig 169 Power supply for fuse block version 2 Fig 169 Auxiliary electric heating version 1 Fig 169 Interior version 2 Fig 169 Interior Engine cooling fan control unit for preheating unit Electrohydraulic power steering ABS Radiator fan Automatic gearbox ABS
180. ecommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Polishing Polishing is necessary if the vehicle s paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives If the polish does not contain any preserving elements the paint must be treated with a preservative afterwards CAUTION a Never apply wax to the windows a Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes a Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment risk of paint scratches a Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides a f possible do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork that come into contact with door seals or window guides Plastic parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts use cleaning products specially designed for this purpose CAUTION Do not use paint care products on plastic parts Rubber seals First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 153 All door seals and window guides are factory treated with a colourless matt var nish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect against driving noise Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any pro
181. ect Mobile Device Interface connecting an external device via the AUX or USB input Multifunction display Manual gearbox Gasoline engine with a multi point fuel injection Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta tion of goods Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque Personal Identification Number personal identification num ber for the connection of electronic devices using Bluetooth Definition TDICR Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection system Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection Abbreviations E Fig 1 Cockpit 8 Using the system Power window in the front passenger door 38 Using the system Door opening lever 35 Light switch and headlight beam control on the dash panel 41 41 22 Bonnet release lever 164 23 Fuse box in the dashboard 197 Lever for adjusting the steering wheel 96 Overview 25 Ignition lock 98 Pedals 101 1 Electrical power windows 39 Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted 2 Door opening lever 35 gt a Seat heater on the front left seat 54 3 Electric exterior mirror adjustment 50 gt amp TCS m 4 Air outlet vents 6 gt 8 Central locking system 34 he gt GP Rear window heater 47 5 Parking ticket holder 56 gt START STOP 16 6 Operating lever o gt Seat heater on the front ri
182. ed for driving in countries with different speed units MAXI DOT display The display of the second speed can be set in the menu item settings page 28 Settings Segment display gt Press the 5 Fig 2 on page 10 key repeatedly until the odometer display flash es page 12 gt Press the 6 key while the display flashes The second speed is displayed instead of the odometer The display of the second speed can be disabled in the same way 1 For models with the speedometer in mph the second speed is displayed in km h Auto Check Control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 Vehicle condition Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked contin uously when the ignition is switched on Some error messages and other information are displayed in the MAXI DOT dis play The messages are displayed simultaneously with the symbols in the MAXI DOT display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster page 14 The menu item Vehicle status is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT dis play whenever at least one fault message exists After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is displayed If there are several error messages the display will show 1 3 for example below the message This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being displayed Warning symbols in the MAXI DOT display Engine oil p
183. ed the seat belt v The bonnet is closed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn JV The driving speed was higher than 4 km h after the last stop ings H on page 116 Z Notrailer is coupled ME Vehicles with manual transmission a WARNING gt Stop the vehicle where necessary apply the handbrake gt Put the gear stick into Neutral The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run ning Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off CAUTION Always deactivate the START STOP system before driving through wa ter page 109 116 Driving gt Release the clutch pedal Automatic engine shut down STOP phase takes place The warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster display gt Depress the clutch pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again START phase The warning symbol goes out Vehicles with automatic transmission gt Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal Automatic engine shut down takes place The warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster display gt Release the brake pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again The warning symbol goes out Further information on automatic transmission Engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in positions P D S and N and in Tiptronic mode When the selector lever is in position P the engine remains shut down even after
184. ediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres a You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down Worn tyres impair necessary adhesion to the road surface particularly at high speeds on wet roads This could lead to aquaplaning uncontrolled ve hicle movement swimming on a wet road surface FI warninec Observe the following information regarding the tyre inflation pressure The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure Check the tyre inflation pressure at regular intervals a Insufficient or excessive inflation pressure impairs handling risk of acci dent a f the inflation pressure is too low the tyre will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance This will cause a significant increase in the temperature of the tyre especially at higher speeds This can result in tread separation and a tyre blowout Wheels 175 EI warnine Observe the following information regarding the wheel bolts The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily Never apply grease or oil a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm a f the wheel bolts are tightened to an insufficient tightening torque the rims may come loose when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and thi
185. eds and a low engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed oc tane number as soon as possible a Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used a Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Inspecting and replenishing 161 CAUTION a Inno case may fuel additives with metal components be used especially not with manganese and iron content LRP lead replacement petrol fuels with metal lic Components may not be used There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system a Fuels with metallic content may not be used There is a risk of causing consider able damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system i Note a Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the en gine can be used without limitations a On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95 91 92 or 93 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power increase or a lower fuel consumption a On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min 95 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel consumption Diesel fuel First read and observe the introductory information and sa
186. educed below around 10 km h or the vehicle was stopped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again Before travelling a long distance at a steep gradient reduce speed and shift into the next lowest gear As a result the braking effect of the engine will be used reducing the load on the brakes Any additional braking should be completed in termittently not continuously Wear and tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted Under these severe conditions the thickness of the brake pads must also be checked by a specialist garage between service intervals Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking dista
187. een with difficulty by other road users a H7 and H15 bulbs are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb Gas discharge bulbs xenon bulbs operate with a high voltage professional knowledge is required risk of death ia Note The corresponding lamp must always be switched off when replacing a light tl bulb Fuses 1 7 are replaced by a specialist garage 200 Do it yourself CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth napkin or sim ilar Rit Note a This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising Other bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage a We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi cle Replacement bulbs can be purchased from SKODAOriginal Accessories a We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage af ter replacing a bulb in the main low or fog beam a Consult a specialist garage in the event of a failure in a xenon gas discharge lamp Bulb arrangement in the headlights Fig 170 Principle sketch Headlight with halogen bulb with Xenon bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on pag
188. effect of direct sunlight in order to al low the heated air to escape The cooling system should not be on if the windows are open SA For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also lower when fuel is being saved page 105 Econom ical driving and environmental sustainability Operational problems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 76 If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be gt One of the fuses has blown Check the fuse and replace if necessa ry page 197 gt The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 11 If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself or if the cooler output has reduced switch off the cooling system and seek assistance from a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements 78 Adjusting 7B Recirculated air mode 79 Heating and air conditioning 77 Control elements BNH 0277 Fig 78 Heating Control elements Adjusting Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 77 Recommended basic settings of the heating controls F WARNING The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting up Functions of
189. ehicles with the multifunction display MFA Information system 23 Gear recommendation Fig 8 Information on the selected gear Gear recommendation trip km 1255 Oia First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 Information on the selected gear The currently engaged gear A is shown in the display Fig 8 Recommended gear In order to minimise the fuel consumption a recommendation for shifting into an other gear is indicated in the display If the system recognises that it is beneficial to change gear an arrow B is dis played The arrow points up or down depending on whether you should shift into a higher or lower gear The gear recommendation is intended only for vehicles with a manual transmis sion or for vehicles with an automatic transmission in manual shift mode Tiptron ic For vehicles with manual transmission the C display indicates the recommended gear EI WARNING The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driv ing situations such as overtaking 1 On vehicles with a segment display the B arrow is displayed behind the C specification 2 Applies to vehicles using the MAXI DOT display 24 Using the system SA For the sake of the environment Correct shifting up has the following advantages a It helps to reduce fuel consumption a It reduces the operating noise a It protects the environment a
190. elected depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle 1 For models with the speedometer in mph the second speed is displayed in km h 28 Using the system Language You can set the language for the display texts here MFD data Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here Time The time time format 12 or 24 hour indicator and the changeover between sum mer winter time can be set here Winter tyres Here you can set the speed at which an audible signal should sound This func tion is for example used for winter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum speed of the vehicle page 175 Tyres and wheel rims The following message appears in the display if the speed limit is exceeded Winter tyres maximum km h Units of measurement The units for the temperature consumption and distance driven can be set here Alt speed dis Here the display of the second speed in mph can be activated Service Here you can have the remaining kilometres and days until the next service inter val displayed and reset the Service Interval Display Factory setting Here the factory settings of the display can be restored CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Prompt in the segment display __ S 29 Prompt in the MAXI DOT display 29 Before the next service interval is reached a message concerning the kilometres and
191. em an update of the relevant phone book is performed The updating can take a few minutes During this time the phone book which was stored after the last update was completed is available Newly stored telephone numbers are on ly shown after the updating has ended The update is interrupted if a telephone event e g incoming or outgoing call voice control dialogue occurs during the updating procedure After the telephone event has ended the updating starts anew The internal phonebook provides 2 500 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500 the phone book is not complete This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal telephone installation at the factory The buttons control the functions for the operating mode of the current tele phone If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated Operation wheel Fig 81 Press briefly MUTE X Increase the volume Turn upwards 86 Using the system Button adjust ment Action Operation wheel Fig 81 Turn downwards Reduce the volume Accept a call end a call Display of the basic Phone menu Main Phone menu gt List of dialled numbers Call selected contact Press briefly Press and hold button Reject the incoming call Turn up down Previous next menu item Press briefly Confirm selec
192. es of display Fig 3 A Segment display MAXI DOT display W Speedometer First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 Warning against excessive speeds An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km h The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls below 120 km h Coolant temperature gauge Fig 4 Coolant temperature gauge BNH 0169 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 The coolant temperature gauge Fig 4 only operates when the ignition is switched on In vehicles with a segment display the coolant temperature is indicated only by the lighting up or going out of one of the warning lights page 16 amp Coolant Instruments and Indicator Lights 11 Cold range If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale this indicates that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads This prevents possible damage to the engine The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the mid range of the scale At very high ambient temperatures or heavy en gine loads the pointer may move even further to the right High temperature range If the pointer reaches the red area of the scale the coolant temperature is too high Furthe
193. etween the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is re duced A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm danger area From this moment on do not continue reversing Assist systems 113 The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device The danger area thus begins at a distance of around 35 cm on vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device Activation deactivation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 113 The system is activated automatically by engaging the reverse gear This is con firmed by a brief audible signal The system is deactivated by disengaging reverse gear i Note For vehicles with a factory fitted towing device the system cannot be activated when towing a trailer CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating deactivating 115 Storing and maintaining speed __ BS Changing the stored speed 115 Switching off temporarily 115 The Cruise Control System CCS maintains a set speed more than 25 km h with out you having to actuate the accelerator pedal This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the cruise control system is switched on 114 Driving EI warnine a For safety reasons the cruise control sys
194. ever be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth gt 1 2 1 63 kW TSI and 1 2 I 77 kW TSI engines Fig 156 gt 1 4 1 90 kW engine Fig 156 B gt 1 6 I 77 kW TDI CR engine Fig 156 c CQO Introduction gt This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front towing eye 192 Rear towing eye 192 Vehicles with a tow hitch 192 Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the automatic gearbox is damaged A tow bar is the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available When towing the following guidelines must be observed Driver of the tow vehicle gt Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelera tor particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox gt On vehicles with a manual transmission only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the towed vehicle gt Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that the turn signal lights horn windscreen wipers and
195. f it This could cause the child severe injury or even death Fig 124 Sticker on the B column on the front passenger side Fig 125 Front passenger sun visor label First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 142 For safety reasons we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the front passenger Seat gt The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat H gt If possible adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the back of the child seat gt If possible move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it gt With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make sure that the loop around fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side gt Set the height adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible gt Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible gt Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac cording to the specifications in the manufacturer s user manual of the child seat EJ wAaRNING The
196. fety warn ings H on page 160 Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 590 stand ard All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with at most 7 biodiesel B7 2 Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel In the cold season only use winter grade diesel fuel which will still operate properly even at a temperature of 20 C It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic SKODA Partners and filling Stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with information re garding the diesel fuels available 1 In Germany also DIN 51628 in Austria NORM C 1590 in Russia GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 2 In Germany according to the DIN 52638 standard in Austria NORM C 1590 in France EN 590 162 General Maintenance Diesel fuel additives Additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar agents should not be mixed with the diesel fuel This can cause serious damage to engine or exhaust system parts CAUTION a Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the stand ard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and exhaust sys tem a f a different fuel other than diesel fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards e g petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Extensive damag
197. fety warn ings H on page 31 The child safety lock prevents the corresponding rear door from being opened from the inside The door can only be opened from the outside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key Switching on gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the direction of the arrow Fig 15 mirror inverted on the right hand door Switching off gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig 15 mirror inverted on the right hand door Opening closing a door BNH 0179 Fig 16 Door handle door opening lever First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 31 Opening from the outside gt Unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle A Fig 16 on the door you wish to open Opening from the inside gt Pull on door opening lever B of the respective door and push the door away from you Closing from the inside gt Grasp pull handle C and close the door FJ warninc Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly while driving risk of death Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening closing range risk of injury An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the vehi cle is on an incline risk of injury Unlocking and opening 35 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activa
198. formation and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light lights up until the engine reaches operating temperature Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads If the warning light lights up or flashes either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK Log book gt Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the coolant level page 169 gt If the coolant level is too low add coolant to the reservoir page 170 gt If the indicator light amp disappears after adding coolant and switching on the ig nition you may continue your journey gt If the coolant level is within the specified range but the indicator light is still illuminated check the fuse for the radiator fan and replace it if necessa ry page 199 Fuses in the engine compartment gt If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the indicator light is still illu minated do not continue your journey gt Seek assistance from a specialist garage EJ warninec If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so a Carefully open the coolant expansion bo
199. forming a quick charge disconnect both battery cables first negative then positive gt Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red posi tive black negative gt Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the device gt After charging has been successful Switch off the charger and remove the mains cable from the power socket gt Only then disconnect the charger s terminal clamps gt Reconnect the cables to the battery first positive then negative It is not necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the ve hicle battery using low amperages for example from a mini charger Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer A charging current of 0 1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity or lower must be used until full charging is achieved It is necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages known as rapid charging The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging Inspecting and replenishing 173 EI WARNING Quick charging the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge CAUTION On vehicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth
200. front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 139 Deactivating airbags a Never use a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passen ger airbag is activated This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag The airbag may cause the child severe or even fatal injuries in the event of it being deployed a This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found in one of the follow ing locations On the B column on the front passenger side Fig 124 The sticker is visi ble upon opening the front passenger door On the front passenger s sun visor In some countries the sticker is loca ted on the front seat passenger s sun visor Fig 125 a With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make sure that the loop around fit tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side As soon as the rear facing child seat is no longer being used on the passen ger seat the front passenger airbag should be re activated again Transporting children safely 143 Child safety and side airbag BNH 0113 Fig 126 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured risk from the side airbag child properly protected by child seat First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on
201. g charged Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately The electrical system re quires checking FJ warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so CAUTION If the indicator light cooling system fault lights up in addition to the indica tor light while driving do not continue driving Stop the engine there is a risk of engine damage Open door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light amp comes on if one or several doors are opened or if the boot lid is opened Instruments and Indicator Lights 15 EI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so 7 Engine Oil First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light lights up red low oil pressure The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Oil pressure Log book Stop the vehicle switch off the engin
202. ght seat 54 gt Turn oe Hehe headlight and parking light headlight flasher 43 Depending on equipment fitted 2 apee regulating system n4 gt Gearshift lever manual gearbox 101 A e gt Selector lever automatic gearbox 102 ee l Handbrake lever 100 gt With driver s front airbag 137 i gt with pushbuttons for radio navigation system and mobile Depending on equipment fitted phone 85 gt Cup holder 58 gt with buttons for the operation of the information system 22 gt sale holder Instrument cluster 10 y Storage compartment 58 9 Operating lever Ra D di l Hien gt Windscreen wiper and wash system 49 Spending Om equipment HSC gt Operating controls for the heating 77 gt Information system 22 ae ie Ghede gt Operating controls for the air conditioning system 79 Air outlets in the central part of the dash pane 76 gt Operating controls for Climatronic 82 Depending on equipment fitted gt Radio Fg Note gt Navigation system Button for hazard warning light system 44 The position of some of the controls on right hand drive models may differ from Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag ___ 140 that shown in Fig 1 The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as Interior rear view mirror 50 for left hand drive models Key switch for switching off the passenger airbag in front passen ger storage compartment 140 Front passenger airbag 137 Storage compartmen
203. has no influence on the life of the lighting system Parking light and low beam Fig 21 Light switch and control dial for headlight range adjustment BNH 0235 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Light switch positions A Fig 21 0 Switching off lights except daytime running lights Switching on the parking light or parking lights on both sides page 45 Parking light z0 Switching on the low beam Switch on the front fog lamp page 43 Q Switching on the rear fog light page 44 Headlight beam control 20 Turning the rotary switch B Fig 21 from position to 3 gradually activates the headlight beam control thereby shortening the beam of light Lights and visibility 41 The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol lowing car load Front seats occupied boot empty 1 All seats occupied boot empty 2 All seats occupied boot loaded 3 Driver seat occupied boot loaded E WARNING Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions a The vehicle does not dazzle other road users especially oncoming vehicles The beam range is sufficient for safe driving Note a We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched on a An audible warning signal will sound if the light switch is in the or 20 posi tion the ignition key is removed and the driver s door is opene
204. hat there are no visible edges Then allow the seat to dry completely CAUTION a Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner a Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the heater a Do not sit on wet seats risk of seat deformation a Always clean the seats from seam to seam Seat belts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 157 The belt webbing must always be kept clean Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush Dirty belt webbing may impair the correct functioning of the inertia reel FI WARNING The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning a Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liq uids e g acids a Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the belt webbing seat belt connections inertia reel or lock is detected the seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage a The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up Vehicle care 159 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Refuelling 160 Unleaded petrol 161 Diesel fuel 162 The correct fuel grades for your vehicle are specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 131 on
205. he function of the cooling system have been met page 79 By lighting up of the warning light in the button the opera tional readiness of the cooling system is signalled 80 Using the system Adjusting Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings M on page 79 Recommended basic settings of the air conditioning controls Control dial settings Fig 79 on page 80 Symbol button Fig 79 on page 80 Air outlet vents 4 Fig 77 Adjustment Defrost defog windscreen and Desired tempera side windows ture As far as it will go Fastest heating to the right A AIC on page 76 Automatically switched Open and align with the side Do not switch on 5 on window Briefly switch on Switched off Opening Desired tempera fine 2or3 Comfortable heating Do not switch on Switched off Opening To the left up to briefly 4 then The fastest cooling the stop gt or3 Briefly switch on Activated Opening Desired tempera 20r3 ture Comfortable cooling Do not switch on Activated Open and align to the roof To the left up to Fresh air mode ventilation the stop Desired position Do not switch on Switched off Opening a We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside b Automatic switch on can be deactivated
206. he handwheel is locked and the key is removed v The cap B is on the handwheel v The tow bar does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy shaking EJ WARNING Do not use the towing device unless the tow bar has been properly locked Removing the ball head Fig 111 Release ball bar an oF First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 gt Remover the cover A from the handwheel lock in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 110 gt Insert the key B into the lock 122 Driving gt Unlock the handwheel lock by turning the key B left as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow 2 the arrow on the key points towards the padlock open icon gt Grip the tow bar from below Fig 111 and with the other hand pull the hand wheel cC in the direction of the arrow 3 gt Turn the handwheel in the direction of the arrow 4 to the stop and hold in this position gt Remove the tow bar from the mounting recess downwards and in the direction of the arrow 5 At the same time the tow bar latches into the ready position and is therefore ready to be re inserted into the mounting recess FH gt Attach the cover for the mounting recess 4 Fig 104 on page 119 EI WARNING a Never allow the tow bar to remain unsecured in the boot This could cause damage on sudden braking and could put the safety of the occupants at risk m
207. he operating weight gt Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer max 50 kg Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to ECE regulations and EU directives The measurement of the intra urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine Afterwards standard urban driving is simulated In the extra urban driving cycle the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears corresponding to daily routine driving conditions The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km h The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 for the intra urban cycle and 63 for the extra urban cycle EI warnine Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights risk of accident and damage Note a f required you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist ga rage a The fuel consumption and emission values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for de termining operational and technical data for motor vehicles a Depending on the range of equipment style of driving traffic situation weather influences and vehicle condition consumption values may deviate from the indi cated values 208 Technical data Dimensions AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 207 Vehicle dimensions mm Length 4483 4304 Width including exterior mirror 1940 1940 1461 1488 1459 1471
208. heat shields When the engine reaches its operating temperature these substances may ignite risk of fire CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Natural leather 158 Artificial leather cloths and Alcantara 158 Seat covers 159 Seat belts 159 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle We recommend using vehicle care products from SKODA Original Accessories These are available from SKODA Partners The usage instructions on the package must be observed EJ warnine a Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions a Always store vehicle care products safely in particular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning CAUTION a Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible Stains on the material leather panels and textiles Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe pol ish etc from the material leather panels and textiles as quickly as possible a Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature in side the vehicle is high Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel there is a risk of dam age to the dash panel a Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows the rear side win dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near
209. hen the mobile phone has connected to the hands free system Restoring the visibility of the hands free system If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands free sys tem within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition the visibility of the hands free system can be re established for 3 minutes in one of the following ways gt By turning the ignition off and on gt By turning voice control off and on gt In the MAXI DOT display under menu item Bluetooth Visibility Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone Check on your mobile phone if the automatic connection has been established Disconnecting the connection The connection to a connected mobile phone can be ended in the following ways gt By withdrawing the ignition key gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting from the user in the MAXI DOT display under the menu item Bluetooth User Solving connection problems If the hands free system reports No paired phone found check the operating Status of the mobile phone gt Is the mobile phone switched on gt Is the PIN code entered gt Is Bluetooth active gt Is the visibility of the mobile phone active gt Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands free system 1 Some mobile phones have a men
210. herefore recommend switching off electrical components if these are no longer required D Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements 108 Driving Environmental compatibility First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Environmental protection has played a major role in the design material selection and production of your new SKODA Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points Design measures gt Joints designed to be easily detached gt Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system gt Improved purity of different classes of materials gt Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 gt Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO gt Minimum fuel leakage during accidents gt Reduced noise Choice of materials gt Extensive use of recyclable material gt Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant gt No cadmium gt No asbestos gt Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture gt Solvent free cavity protection gt Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer gt The use of solvent free adhesives gt No CFCs used in the production process gt Without use of mercury gt Use of water soluble paints Trade in and recycling of old cars SKODA meets the requirements of the brand and
211. hold button to go back one level in the menu of the MAXI DOT display Press briefly Select data Turn upwards or downwards Set data values Turn upwards or downwards Show data Press briefly Confirm data Press briefly Ice warning After pressing button A Fig 7 on page 22 the most recently displayed data is shown First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 a WARNING Even at outside temperatures of around 4 C black ice may still be present on the road surface You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tem perature display for an indication of whether there is black ice on the road Prompt in the MAXI DOT display If the outside temperature while driving drops to below 4 C the following icon appears on the display in front of the temperature display An audible signal is emitted If the outside temperature is already below 4 C when turning the ignition on the icon appears immediately An audible signal is emitted Prompt in the segment display If the outside temperature while driving drops to below 4 C the temperature display page 26 Outside temperature will show up with the following icon in front An audible signal is emitted If the outside temperature is already below 4 C when turning the ignition on the temperature display and the amp icon appear immediately An audible signal is emitted 1 Applies to v
212. hts up if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres Check and adjust the pressure in all tyres page 175 If the indicator light flashes there is a fault in the system 20 Using the system Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Further information page 178 Tyre pressure monitor Note If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected the indicator light 1 comes on after switching on the ignition If the indicator light does not go out after moving a short distance this means that there is an error in the system Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately lt gt Windscreen washer fluid level First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low the warning light amp comes on The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Top up wash fluid Top up with liquid page 165 Windscreen washer system lt a gt Turn signal system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 Either the left or right gt indicator light flashes depending on the position of the operating lever If there is a fault in the turn signal system the indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both warning
213. ic played back via the hands free system can be controlled with the remote control page 92 Voice commands ae Note The device being connected must support the Bluetooth A2DP profile refer to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel Version 1 The radio and the navigation system can of course still be operated via the devi ces A description is included in the relevant operating instructions If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio audio video or navigation system The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons B5E 0096 Fig 85 Multifunction steering wheel Navigation control buttons Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 92 The multifunction steering wheel features buttons for operating the basic func tions for the factory fitted radio and navigation system Fig 85 Button adjust ment Action Audio sources Navigation wheel Fig 85 1 Press Change audio source A Dress Switch tone off on MUTE X Interrupt a ee i announce 2 Turn upwards Increase the volume 2 Turn downwards Reduce the volume Skip to next channel Skip to next track No function 3 Press briefly Inte
214. icle which is not standing on a paved road a Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes page 192 or page 192 to the detachable ball head of the towing equipment page 119 Emergency equipment and self help 191 z Note For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through a We recommend using a tow rope from KODA Original Accessories which is the eye available from a KODA Partner l gt Unscrew the towing eye against the direction of the arrow 2 a Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle Unskilled E CAUTION drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in a When towing respect the national legal provisions especially those which re The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise late to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting a The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle Rear towing eye Front towing eye Fig 158 Rear towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 191 Fig 157 Front bumper Removing the cap
215. icle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system only cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be added to the windscreen washer fluid a Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when refill ing as this may cause contamination of the liquid transportation system leading in turn to a windscreen washer system malfunction CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Specifications and capacity 167 Checking the oil level 167 Replenishing 168 Changing 168 The engine has been factory filled with a high grade oil that can be use through out the year except in extreme climate zones 1 In some countries 5 4 applies for both variants 166 General Maintenance The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development Thus the infor mation stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publication SKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manufac turer We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a SKODA Service Partner The specifications VW standards stated in the following can be indicated sepa rately or together with other specifications on the bottle The oil capacities include oil filter change Check the oil level when filling do not over fill The oil level must be between the markings page 167 EI warnine The engine compartmen
216. ide quality work We therefore advise you to have all modifications re pairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a SKODA Service Partner SKODA Genuine Parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 We recommend the use of SKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle as these parts are approved by KODA AUTO a s They correspond precisely to the KODA AUTO a s regulations with regard to design dimensional accuracy and material and are identical to the components used in series production KODA AUTO a s is able to vouch for the safety suitability and long service life of these products We therefore recommend that you only use SKODA Genuine Parts KODA AUTO a s supplies the market with a complete range of KODA Genuine Parts not only while the model is still in production but for at least 15 years after the end of series production for wear parts and at least 10 years after the end of series production for all other vehicle parts SKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of SKODA Genuine Parts for a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement You should keep the approved war ranty certificate and the invoices for these components for this period of time so that the commencement of the term can be verified Body repairs SKODA vehicles are designed such that if any da
217. ies which are available from a SKODA Partner fire extinguisher Fig 148 Fire extinguisher Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 182 The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driver s Seat Removing attaching gt Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the ar row Fig 148 gt Remove the fire extinguisher Follow these steps in the reverse order for attachment Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguish er The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year The national legal requirements must be observed EJ warnine The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants i Note The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements a Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher Proper functioning of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date a The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only Vehicle tool kit Fig 149 Vehicle tool kit Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 182 The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the storage space for
218. igni tion is switched on The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected Top up with windscreen wiper fluid page 165 48 Using the system EI WARNING a Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving page 195 a Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating the windscreen beforehand Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea sons These can be purchased from a KODA Partner CAUTION In cold temperatures and during the winter check before the journey or before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor a If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the ignition is turned back on The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold temperatures be tween the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned back on again a Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving a f the windscreen wiper
219. ill not lock in place properly a Many layers of clothing and loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jacket do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts a It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts e g for shortening the belts for smaller persons The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position page 55 FJ warninc Observe the following instructions for proper maintenance of the seat belts The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belt webbing may im pair proper operation of the inertia reel page 159 a The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the seat belts seat belt connections inertia reel or the lock is detected the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a specialist garage The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected The an chorage points for the belts should also be checked it Note The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts The physical principle of a frontal collision of aN AN BNH 01
220. immediate deployment range of the airbags a Never leave a mobile phone on a Seat on the dash panel or in any area where it can become a projectile during a sudden braking manoeuvre an acci dent or a collision risk of injury The Bluetooth function must be switched off by a specialist company be fore the vehicle can be transported by air i Note We recommend that the installation of mobile phones and two way radio sys tems in a vehicle be carried out by a specialist garage Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth communication are compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II You can ask a KODA Partner whether your telephone is compatible with the GSM II universal telephone fitting The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands free system is restricted to the vehicle interior The range is dependent on local factors e g obstacles be tween the devices and mutual interferences with other devices If your mobile phone is in a jacket pocket for example this can lead to difficulties when estab lishing a connection with the hands free system or transferring data Introductory information First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II hands free system includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steering wheel the radio or navigation system The universal
221. in electrical components consume electricity e g control units also in idle state Prevent the battery from discharging by discon necting the battery s negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current a f the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge SA For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations _ Note You should replace batteries older than 5 years Opening the cover figs Vehicle battery Open up the cover Coy First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 The battery is located in the engine compartment gt Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 139 The installation of the battery cover on the positive terminal side takes place in the reverse order Checking the battery electrolyte level Fig 140 Vehicle battery Electrolyte level indicator as eee AC veee ROA e uM gt ym a _ First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator the so called magic eye Fig 140 the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour Air bu
222. in power socket 124 driving with a trailer 124 Loading 123 Safety eye 124 Transport Luggage compartment 64 Roof rack system 74 Transporting children safely 142 Turn signal 43 Turn signal system Indicator light 20 two way radio systems 85 Type plate 207 Tyre inflation pressure Indicator light 20 Tyre load bearing capacity See Wheels 177 Tyre pressure monitor Setting 178 Tyre repair Check pressure 189 Preparations 188 Sealing and inflating the tyre 188 Tyres 175 Inflation pressure 176 New 177 See Wheels 177 Sizes 176 Tyre wear indicator 176 U Underbody protection 157 Unleaded petrol 110 Unlocking Individual settings Key Remote control Vehicle key Unlocking and locking USB Useful equipment 12 volt power outlet Ashtray Car park ticket holder Cigarette lighter Clothes hook Cup holders Glasses storage box Holder for reflective vest Multimedia holder 34 32 33 32 31 95 60 59 56 59 63 58 62 57 61 Storage compartment in the front armrest 62 57 Storage compartments in the doors Using the information system Using the selector lever V Variable loading floor Folding up Inserting 22 102 70 73 72 72 Lower position Parking position Removing 73 72 71 Upper position Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation charging Checking the battery electr
223. ing 160 Fuel 160 Remote control Locking 33 Replacing the battery 193 Synchronisation process 194 Unlocking 33 Remote control key Replacing the battery 193 Repairs and technical alterations 149 Replacing Bulb for main beam daytime running lights and parking light 202 Bulb for the fog light 203 Bulb for the licence plate light 203 Bulb in rear light Rapid Spaceback 206 Bulb in rear light Rapid Bulbs Fuses Fuses in the dash panel Fuses in the engine compartment Low beam bulb Vehicle battery Windscreen wiper blades Wiper blades Replenishing Coolant Engine oil Windscreen washer fluid Revolution counter 204 200 197 197 199 201 174 195 196 170 168 165 TI Roof luggage rack 74 Attachment points Roof rack system Roof load Running in The first 1500 km Running in Brake pads Engine Tyres S SAFE See Safe securing system 74 75 104 105 104 105 33 SAFELOCK See Safe securing system 33 Safe securing system 33 Safety Child safety Child safety seats Correct seated position Head restraints 126 142 142 127 ISOFIX TOP TETHER Saving electrical energy 145 146 105 Seals Taking care of your vehicle 155 Seat Adjusting S Y 53 Seat belt warning light 15 Seat belts 130 Belt tensioners 133
224. installing the towing eye The rear towing eye is located below the bumper on the right First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Remove the protective cap before using the towing eye Fig 158 Replace the ings on page 191 protective cap after using the towing eye Removing installing the cap gt Press on the cap in the area A Fig 157 gt Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow 1 gt After unscrewing the towing eye insert the area B of the cap under the right hand side of the hole in the front bumper and then press on the opposite side of the cap Vehicles with a tow hitch First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 191 The cap must engage firmly For vehicles with a factory fitted towing device the pre installed detachable tow bar may be used page 119 Towing device Removing installing the towing eye gt Manually screw the towing eye as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to us 2 Fig 157 H ing the towing eye 192 Do it yourself CAUTION The detachable ball rod and or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable tow bar is used fi Note The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for towing if necessary CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subject
225. ion of air flow Recirculated air mode activated Cooling system activated Blower speed set llle Nee N The buttons control dial Adjust the blower speed page 84 Interior temperature sensor AUTO Switching automatic mode on page 83 max Switch the intensive windscreen heater on off page 84 Air flow to the windows Air flow to the upper body Air flow in the footwell Switch recirculation on off page 83 A C Switching the cooling system on off page 83 we o h X Note Do not stick anything onto or cover the interior temperature sensor 1 Fig 80 as this could impair the functioning of the Climatronic automatic mode mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 82 The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car Recommended setting for all periods of the year gt Set the desired temperature we recommend 22 C gt Press the button AUTO The display shows AUTO pos 4 Fig 80 on page 82 gt Set the air outlet vents 3 and 4 Fig 77 on page 76 so that the air flow is direc ted slightly upwards Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air distribution or by increasing decreasing the blower speed The temperature is nevertheless regulated Switching the cooling system on off AR First read and observe the introductory information given on
226. ion position of the attachment points for roof bars Fig 76 A Rear attachment points Front attachment points Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions CAUTION Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the enclosed instructions Roof load First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 The maximum permissible roof load including roof rack system of 75 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is used In this case the roof rack system must only be loa ded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions Seats and useful equipment 75 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Air outlets 76 Using the cooling system economically 77 Operational problems 77 The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during winter months It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling ef fect Please refer to the information regarding re
227. ional tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to ensure the op timal characteristics of these tyres These characteristics mainly relate to the following gt Increased driving stability gt Reduced risk of aquaplaning gt Reduced tyre noise and tyre wear 178 General Maintenance Tyre pressure monitor Fig 143 Button for setting the tyre infla tion pressure control value O o BNH 0230 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 System settings After changing the tyre inflation pressure after changing one or several wheels or changing the position of a wheel on the vehicle e g replacing the wheels be tween the axles or if the indicator light illuminates while driving a system con figuration must be carried out as follows gt Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure page 176 gt Switch on the ignition gt Press the symbol button i Fig 143 for longer than 2 seconds If the warning light lights up and does not go out after the system configura tion this indicates a system fault If the warning light flashes there is a system fault Tyre pressure indicator The warning light lights up in any of the following ca
228. ision Storage compartments in the doors Fig 43 Storage compartment in the front door in the rear door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 Explanation of graphic Fig 43 A Storage compartment in the front doors Bottle compartment in the front doors Storage compartment in the rear doors D Bottle compartment in the rear doors EJ warnine In order to ensure that the operating range of the side airbag is not impaired area A Fig 43 of the storage compartment must only be used for storing objects that do not protrude i Note In area B of the storage compartment of the front doors a bottle can be housed with a max content of 1 5 In area D of the storage compartment of the rear doors a bottle with a max content of 0 5 can be stored Holder for reflective vest Fig 44 Driver seat High visibility vest holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 The holder for the reflective vest is located under the driver s seat Fig 44 FJ warninec Do not put anything else except the reflective vest into the holder other wise it may fall out of the holder risk of obstruction or limitation in operating the pedal CAUTION Do not put anything else except the reflective vest into the holder risk of dam age to the holder Seats and useful equipment 57 Storage compartments in centre
229. its products with regard to pro tecting the environment and the preserving resources All new SKODA vehicles can be utilized up to 95 and always be returned In a lot of countries sufficient trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confir mation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations Note You can find more detailed information about the trade in and recycling of old cars from a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects General information 109 Driving through water on streets 109 General information Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 109 Pay attention to low slung parts of the vehicle such as the spoiler and exhaust particularly in the following situations gt When driving on poorly maintained roads and paths gt When driving over kerbs gt When driving on steep ramps etc Particular attention must be paid for vehicles with sport suspension and when the vehicle is fully laden Driving through water on streets Figeo3 Driving through water Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 109 The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided when driving through water e g flooded roads gt Determine the depth of the water before drivi
230. ke which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating This can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system risk of accident CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manual gear changing 101 Pedals 101 Manual gear changing Fig 92 Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or 6 gear manual gearbox pS Saas annro Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 101 Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down This prevents uneven wear to the clutch The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 24 Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before reverse gear is engaged to avoid any shift noises The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the igni tion is on FJ warnine Never engage reverse gear when driving risk of accident CAUTION If not in the process of changing gear do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mecha nism to wear excessively Pedals Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 101 The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances In the driver s footwell only a footmat which is attached to the two correspond ing attachment points may be
231. key will return to position 2 gt Release the handbrake If the engine does not start within 10 seconds turn the key to position 1 Repeat the start up process after approx half a minute Vehicles with manual transmission The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following message is shown in the information cluster display Q Depress clutch to start CLUTCH Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the following mes sage appears in the display Apply the brake to start BRAKE LT CAUTION If the engine does not start up after a second attempt the fuse for the fuel pump may have a fault Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 197 Fuses in the dash panel or seek assistance from a specialist garage Switching off the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 97 Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key into position 1 Fig 90 on page 98 For vehicles with automatic transmission the ignition key can only be removed if the selector lever is in position P CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information on braking __ SSS 100 Handbrake 100 EJ warnine Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switched off risk of
232. kit gt Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 174 Changing light bulbs for fog lights gt Unscrew the screws Fig 174 B marked with the arrows gt Unlock the fuse in the direction of the arrow 2 with the screwdriver gt Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 3 gt Remove the connector Fig 175 1 The screwdriver is part of the tool kit gt Turn the bulb holder in an anti clockwise direction as far as the stop and then remove it Fig 175 gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb into the headlight and turn in a clock wise direction as far as the stop gt Attach the connector gt Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 3 Fig 174 and tighten gt Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in The protective grille must engage firmly Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light Fig 176 Remove the number plate light replace the bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 gt Open the boot lid gt Push in the lamp in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 176 The lamp comes loose gt Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 gt Insert a new bulb into the holder gt Reinsert the lamp in the opposite
233. l and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Firmly apply the handbrake Starting off and Driving 103 gt Press and hold the lock button Fig 94 on page 102 gt Move the selector lever into position P and then release the locking button Kickdown The kickdown function allows you to achieve the maximum acceleration of your vehicle while driving When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed the kickdown function is activated in any forward driving mode The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed and engine speed and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range EI WARNING Rapid acceleration particularly on slippery roads can lead to loss of vehicle control risk of accident Malfunction First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 101 Emergency programme The transmission switches to the emergency programme if there is a fault in the automatic gearbox system Indications of an activated emergency programme include the following gt Only certain gears are selected gt The reverse gear R cannot be used gt Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible Gearbox overheating The gearbox may become too hot due to frequent repeated starting or stop and go traffic for example Overheating is indicated by the warning light page 13 lt i
234. l collisions side and rear end collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front FJ warninc a Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a specialist garage The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident If the belt tensioners have been deployed it is then necessary to replace the entire system Seat belts 133 Note a Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an indi cation of a fire in the vehicle a When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system it is impor tant to comply with national legal requirements SKODA service partners are fa miliar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed infor mation 134 Safety CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects System description 135 Airbag deployment 135 FJ warnine An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a fas tened seat belt a The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but instead forms part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept TO ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size page 127
235. later Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wipers to continue for another 1 3 wiper strokes depending on the spraying duration Automatic wipe wash for the rear window The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wiper wipes somewhat later Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wiper to continue for another 1 3 wiper strokes depending on the spray ing duration The operating lever remains in position 6 Headlight cleaning system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 After the ignition is switched on the headlights are always cleaned at the first and after every tenth spray of the windscreen 5 Fig 32 on page 49 when the low beam or main beam is switched on You should remove stubborn dirt Such as insect residues from the headlight len ses at regular intervals for example when refuelling The following guidelines must be observed page 156 Headlight lenses To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter any snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de icing spray CAUTION Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand risk of damage CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Interior mirror 50 Exterior mirror 50
236. le interior or if the vehicle has to be transported e g by train or ship or towed LI CAUTION a The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in terior monitor To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle a The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if the safe securing system is deactivated The interior monitor is however not activa ted CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening closing 38 Automatic locking 38 F WARNING a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid Other wise the boot lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving even if it was locked risk of accident a Never drive with the boot lid open or unlatched as otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment lid as otherwise it could crack risk of injury CAUTION a If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed the lid is immediately locked automatically when closed a Do not press on the rear window when closing the tailgate it could crack i Note The function of the button in the grip above the licence plate is deactivated when starting off or at a speed of 5 km hour or more for vehicles with central
237. legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel Preliminary work First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 184 Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel gt Have all of the occupants get out of the vehicle While changing a tyre the oc cupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road they should instead remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine gt Move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the auto matic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Uncouple any trailers gt Remove the vehicle tool kit page 183 and the spare wheel page 179 from the boot Changing a wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 184 gt Remove the full wheel trim page 180 or caps page 180 gt First of all slacken the anti theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts page 185 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground page 186 gt Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc gt Remove the wheel carefully gt Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts gt Lower the vehicle gt Alternately tighten wheel bolts opposite diagonally with the wheel wrench
238. lements _ CB automatic mode 83 Switching the cooling system on off 83 Setting the temperature _ 8B recirculated air mode 83 Controlling blower 84 Defrosting windscreen __ BY The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best possible setting of the tem perature of the outflowing air the blower stage and air distribution The system also takes sunlight into account which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met Y The cooling system is switched on page 82 Control elements v The engine is running JZ The outside temperature is above approx 2 C The cooling system is switched off at excessive coolant temperatures in order to guarantee a cooling effect when the engine is under a high load i Note We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once ev ery year 82 Using the system Control elements CLIMATRONIC D_E YA AUTO Max Ww 2 y A AIC BNH 0248 Fig 80 Climatronic Control elements AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 82 The buttons control dial 1 Setting the interior temperature page 83 Display Display of selected interior temperature Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit change the displayed temperature units page 83 Setting the temperature Automatic operation of the air conditioning system Ventilation or defrosting of the windshield activated Direct
239. lights to flash Further information page 43 Turn signal and main beam First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light 0 lights up when the fog lights are switched on For further information see page 43 a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 14 The indicator light lights up when the cruise control system is active For further information see page 114 E First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up operate the brake pedal This is necessary to be able to move the selector lever from position P or N page 103 a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light 20 lights up when the main beam or headlamp flasher is switched on For further information see page 43 a Instruments and Indicator Lights 21 Depending on the vehicle equipment the information system provides the fol lowing advice and information gt Ice warning page 23 gt Recommended gear page 24 gt Door boot lid or bonnet warning page 24 gt Compass display page 24 gt Data relating to the multi function display MFD page 25 gt Warning against excessive speed page 27 gt Data relating to the Maxi DOT display page 27 gt Service interval display
240. limit 1 If no value is set the output value 30 km h is automatically displayed If you wish to adjust the set speed limit you can do so in 5 km h intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h gt Store the speed limit or wait several seconds your settings will be saved auto matically Change or disable speed limit gt Select the menu item Speed warning MAXI DOT display or segment dis play gt By confirming the stored value the speed limit is disabled gt By reconfirming the option to change the speed limit is activated If the set speed limit is exceeded an audible signal will sound as a warning The menu item Speed warning MAXI DOT display or Segment display appears in the display at the same time as the set threshold The set speed limit value remains stored even after switching off the ignition CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Main menu 28 Settings ge EEeesSsSsss ses2E The MAXI DOT display provides you with information about the current operating state of your vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment it also provides you with data relating to the radio multifunction display MFD mobile phone naviga tion system automatic gearbox page 101 and devices connected via the MDI in put EJ warnine Concentrate fully on your driving at all times As the driver you are fully re sponsible f
241. list contains instructions which if not observed may cause serious injuries or death This list is not complete however we would like you to familiar ise yourself with this subject Observe the following instructions while driving gt Do not stand up gt Do not stand on the seats gt Do not kneel on the seats gt Do not tilt the seat backrest too far back gt Do not lean against the dash panel gt Do not lie on the rear seats gt Do not sit only on the front part of the seat gt Do not sit facing to the side gt Do not lean out of the window gt Do not put your feet out of the window gt Do not put your feet on the dash panel gt Do not put your feet on the seat cushion gt Do not allow anybody to travel in the footwell gt Do not drive without fastening your seat belt gt Do not delay in the luggage compartment Passive Safety 129 CQ Introduction Fig 114 Driver wearing seat belt This chapter contains information on the following subjects The physical principle of a frontal collision Y B83 Fastening and unfastening seat belts 132 Belt height adjustment on the front seats 133 Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ac cident They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated posi tion
242. load information on the type plate of the towing device is merely a test value for the towing device The vehicle specific values are detailed in the vehicle documents F warnine Do not exceed the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the maximum permissible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer risk of accident and serious injury a Slipping loads can significantly impair the stability and safety of the vehicle trailer combination risk of accident and serious injury Towing a trailer 123 Driving with a trailer Fig 112 Swivel out the 13 pin power socket First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 123 Before the journey gt Grip the 13 pin socket on the handle A and swing out in the direction of the arrow Fig 112 gt Lift off protective cap 5 Fig 104 on page 119 After the journey gt Grip the 13 pin socket on the handle A and swing in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig 112 gt Place the protective cover 5 Fig 104 on page 119 onto the tow bar Safety eyelet The purpose of the safety eyelet B Fig 112 is to attach the breakaway cable of the trailer When attaching the breakaway cable to the safety eyelet it must sag freely against the vehicle in all trailer positions sharp bends in reverse etc Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic
243. luctuations Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices Waste container Fig 52 Replace bags First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 The waste container can be inserted into the slots in the doors page 57 Insert waste container gt Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot gt Push the waste container to the back in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 51 gt Push the waste container as required in the direction of arrow 2 Remove the waste container gt Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 Fig 51 Open close waste container gt Open the waste container in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 51 Closing takes place in reverse order Replace bags gt Remove the waste container from the slot gt Push the two catches of the inner frame out of the container body in the direc tion of the arrow 4 Fig 52 gt Pull the bag together with the inner frame down in the direction of arrow 5 gt Remove the bag from the inside frame gt Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction of arrow 6 gt Insert the bag with the frame in the direction of arrow 7 into the container body The two catches of the inner frame must click into place EJ warnine Never use the waste container as an ashtray risk of fire Only replace the bag whe
244. m Once the car is locked from the outside the door locks are automatically blocked by the safe securing system H The following is true after unlocking gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked gt The interior light which is switched by the door contact comes on gt The safe securing system is switched off gt The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is deactivated The following is true after locking gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked gt The interior lights connected over the door contact go off gt The safe securing system is switched on 1 Applies to vehicles with a lockable fuel filler cap 2 Applies to vehicles with an anti theft alarm system gt The warning light in the driver door begins flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is activated Displaying an error If the indicator light in the driver s door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec onds and then lights up for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing again slowly you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage F warnine a f the car is locked and the safe securing system activated no people must remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or open a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk
245. m permissible load of the hook is 7 5 kg Luggage compartment cover a BNH 0266 Fig 63 Secure luggage compartment cover First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 The boot cover can be removed if you want to transport bulky goods Removing gt Unhook the support straps A Fig 63 from the boot gt On the underside of the cover in the area between the bolts tap B gt Remove the cover The dismantled luggage compartment cover can be stowed away behind the rear seat backrest in the so called parking position page 68 Installing gt Place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel gt a the mounts on the cover C Fig 63 onto the side trim panel via bolts Bi gt Interlock the cover by lightly knocking on the top side of the cover in the area between the bolts gt Hook the support straps A onto the tailgate EJ warninec No objects should be placed on the boot cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something CAUTION a The maximum permissible load of the luggage compartment cover is 1 kg a Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects placed in this area a When closing the boot lid jamming and damage to the luggage compartment cover or the side trim panel can occur if handled in an unprofessional
246. mage occurs to the body it is on ly necessary to replace those parts that are actually damaged However before you decide to have damaged body parts replaced you should first of all contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not the parts can also be repaired Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper SKODA Genuine Accessories First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 149 If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle you should remember the following We recommend that you use SKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle SKODA AUTO a s has selected these accessories to ensure that they are reliable safe and suitable for your particular vehicle Although we constantly monitor the mar ket we are not able to assess or vouch for other products even though in some instances such parts may have operational approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory All accessory products are subjected to a challenging process in the areas of tech nical development technical testing and quality inspection customer testing and the product only becomes a SKODA Genuine Accessory if all tests are passed Our SKODA Genuine Accessories service also includes expert advice and profes sional fitting if required by the customer SKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of SKODA Genuine Accessories for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in
247. ms must audibly snap into place Tail lamp Rapid Spaceback BNH 0149 Fig 181 Installing the lamp connector lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 200 Removing gt Open the boot lid gt Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 183 Vehicle tool kit into the hole at the Position indicated by the arrow Fig 180 A gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 180 A gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp Fig 180 B gt Grip the tail lamp and carefully remove it by jiggling it out in the opposite direc tion of travel gt Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp Fig 181 c Installing gt Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely gt Insert the lamp into the mounts in the body Fig 181 D gt Carefully press the tail lamp into the body so that the bolts 2 Fig 182 on page 206 on the lamp engage into the mounts in the body M Ensure that the cable bundle does not become pinched between the body and the lamp gt Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover The cover must engage securely CAUTION a Ensure that the cable bundle does not become pinched between the body and the lamp when it is being refitted risk of damage to the electric installation and risk of water ingress
248. n ings H on page 171 The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from discharg ing when the battery is put under high levels of strain This manifests itself by the following gt The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the electrical system gt Where necessary large convenience consumers such as seat heaters and rear window heaters have their power limited or are shut off completely in the event of an emergency CAUTION Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management the vehi cle battery may be drained For example when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during longer parking Consumers that are supplied via a 12 V power socket can cause the vehicle bat tery to discharge when the ignition is switched off Note Driving comfort is not impaired by consumers being deactivated The driver is of ten not aware of it having taken place CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Service life of tyres 176 New tyres 177 Unidirectional tyres 178 Tyre pressure monitor 178 Spare wheel 179 Full wheel trim 180 Wheel bolts 180 Wheel bolts 180 F warnine a The national legal regulations must be observed for the use of tyres Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chai
249. n ings H on page 56 Meshed pockets for storing small lightweight objects such as mobile phones or MP3 players are provided on the inner side of the front seat backrests Fig 58 EI warnine Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the meshed pockets Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the meshed pockets is 150 g a Never put large objects into the meshed pockets e g bottles or objects with sharp edges risk of damaging the meshed pockets CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Class N1 vehicles Fastening elements Fixing nets Hooks Luggage compartment cover Parking position of the boot cover Storage compartments in the boot Flexible storage compartment Rapid Spaceback Meshed pocket for storage Rapid Spaceback Double sided floor covering 65 65 66 66 67 68 69 69 70 70 Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling char acteristics of your vehicle gt Distribute loads as evenly as possible gt Place heavy objects as far forward as possible gt Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the nets page 65 In the event of an accident even small and light objects gain so much kinetic en ergy that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the ve hicle is t
250. n ____ 86 Control telephone from the multifunction steering wheel Version2 87 Symbols in the display 88 Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system 88 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 89 SKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two way radio systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up to 10 watts Please consult a SKODA Partner for information about the possibility of installing and operating mobile phones and two way radio systems with a transmission power of more than 10 W Operating mobile phones or two way radio systems may interfere with the func tionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle The reasons for this are as follows gt no external aerial gt external aerial incorrectly installed gt transmission power greater than 10 watts FJ warnine Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be ob served BE WARNING Continued f a mobile phone or a two way radio system is operated in a vehicle without an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incorrectly this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the vehicle Two way radio systems mobile phones or mounts must not be installed on airbag covers or within the
251. n and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the ABS The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display O Error ABS The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately EI warninec a If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so a If the warning light page 15 is displayed together with warning light do not continue your journey Seek help from a specialist garage a A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle s braking distance risk of accident 9 Rear fog light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light 0 comes on when the rear fog light is switched on For further information see page 44 1 Applies to vehicles with START STOP system 18 Using the system Bulb failure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light lights up if a bulb is faulty The indicator light lights up within a few seconds after switching on the igni tion or when a light with a faulty bulb is
252. n and safety warn ings H on page 56 The 12 volt power socket is located in the front centre console Fig 50 Using the power socket gt Remove the power socket cover or the cigarette lighter gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket The 12 volt power sockets and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn H F WARNING Improper use of the 12 volt power socket and the electrical accessories can cause fires burns and other serious injuries Never leave children unattended in the vehicle a f the connected electric device becomes too hot switch it off and discon nect it from the power supply immediately CAUTION a The 12 volt power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical accessories with a total power uptake of up to 120 watt a Never exceed the maximum power consumption otherwise the vehicle s elec trical system can be damaged a Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle a Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the 12 volt power socket 60 Using the system Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives a Before turning the ignition on or off and before starting the car switch off the device connected to the 12 volt power socket to prevent any damage caused by voltage f
253. n the vehicle is stationary risk of accident Note We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags Multimedia holder Fig 53 Multimedia holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 The multimedia holder is located in the front centre console Fig 53 You can use this holder to store e g a mobile phone MP3 player or similar devi ces F WARNING Never use the multimedia holder as an ashtray risk of fire Seats and useful equipment 61 i First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Storage compartment in the front arm rest ings Hl on page 56 Opening gt Press on the lid of the glasses storage box in area A Fig 55 The box folds in the direction of the arrow Closing gt Swivel the lid of the glasses storage box against the direction of the ar row Fig 55 until it audibly clicks into place EI WARNING The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed The open compartment restricts the driver s view there is a danger of acci BNH 0225 Fig 54 Opening the storage compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn dents ings H on page 56 ae Opening CAUTION gt Press the button A at the front of the armrest Fig 54 7 gt Lift the lid of the storage box in the direction of the arrow Do not put any heat
254. nce has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further the brake system may be faulty Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriate ly as you will not know the exact extent of the damage 100 Driving Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 15 Brake system Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Handbrake Fig 91 Handbrake IBNH 0083 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 99 Apply gt Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards Release gt Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the lock but ton Fig 91 gt Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied provided the ignition is on A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand brake applied The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Release parking brake The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more than around 6 km h for more than 3 seconds EJ WARNING Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbra
255. ncy equipment and self help 193 Synchronising the remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 193 If the vehicle does not unlock when pressing the remote control the key may not be synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the remote control key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery in the remote control key was replaced Synchronise the key as follows gt Press any button on the remote control key gt Pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 mi nute CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Locking a door 194 Unlocking the tailgate 194 Selector lever emergency unlocking 195 Locking a door Fig 160 Left rear door Emergency lock ing B5J 0258 194 Do it yourself AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 194 An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which have no locking cylinder it is only visible after opening the door gt Remove the panel A Fig 160 gt Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the di rection of the arrow mirror inverted on the right doors gt Replace the cover After closing the door it cannot be opened from the outside The door is unlocked by pulling on the door opening le
256. nd safety warn ings H on page 153 Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir rors The ice scraper can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt Open the fuel filler flap gt Slide out the ice scraper in the direction of the arrow Fig 130 Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose Vehicle care 155 When drying the windows after washing the vehicle do not use window leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork Residues of preservatives in the window leather can make the window dirty and reduce visibility CAUTION a The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direction to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass a Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel sand or salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors there is a risk of dam age to the surface of the windows and mirrors a Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water risk of cracks forming in the glass a When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage a Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp edged objects or corrosive and acidic cleaning agents there is a risk of damaging the heating elements or window aerial Headlight lenses First
257. nd speed must there fore be adapted to the current circumstances a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres a Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility weather road and traffic conditions The permissible roof load permissible axle loads and permissible total vehi cle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstance risk of accident CAUTION a Only use roof rack systems approved by KODA AUTO a s a When dealing with roof rack systems the installation instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system must be observed a On models fitted with a power sliding tilting roof ensure that the extended Sliding tilting roof does not hit any items of luggage transported on the roof a Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened 74 Using the system a The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it Compare the vehicle height with available clear ances such as underpasses and garage doors a Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash a Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load SA For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption Attachment points BNH 0206 Fig 76 Attachment points for roof bars First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 74 Installat
258. ndows 38 C Car computer See multifunction display 25 Car park ticket holder 56 Carrier 74 Cavity protection 156 Central locking button 34 Changing Brake fluid 171 Engine oil 168 Front turn signal bulb 202 Wheels 184 Changing a wheel Follow up work 185 Preliminary work 184 Remove and attaching a wheel 185 Charging a vehicle battery 173 Check Fit ball head properly 121 Checking Battery electrolyte level 173 Brake fluid 170 Coolant 169 Engine oil 167 Oil level 167 Windscreen washer fluid 165 Children and safety 142 Child safety Side airbag 144 Child safety lock 35 Child seat Classification 144 ISOFIX 145 on the front passenger seat 143 TOP TETHER 146 Use of child seats 144 Use of ISOFIX child seats 145 Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle 155 Cigarette lighter 59 Cleaning 147 Alcantara 158 Artificial leather 158 cloths 158 Covers of electrically heated seats 159 Headlight lenses 156 Natural leather 158 Plastic parts 154 Wheels 156 Climatronic 82 automatic mode 83 Control elements 82 Controlling blower 84 Cooling system 83 Defrosting windscreen 84 recirculated air mode 83 Setting the temperature 83 Clock 13 Clothes hook 63 Cockpit 12 volt power outlet 60 Ashtray 59 Cigarette lighter 59 General view 9 Lights 45 Practical equipment 56 Storage compartments 56
259. ned in the coolant may ignite FJ warninc The following warning instructions must be observed at all times when work ing in the engine compartment while the engine is running a Pay particular attention to rotating engine parts e g V ribbed belt genera tor radiator fan and the high voltage ignition system risk to life m Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system a Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the vehicle s battery a Always make sure that no jewellery loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts risk to life Always remove any jewellery tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any work FJ warninec The following warning instructions must be observed if work has to be carried out on the fuel or electrical systems a Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system Do not smoke a Never work near open flames a Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby FI WARNING a Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid con tainers a Keep fluids in their original containers and keep securely out of the reach of children Inspecting and replenishing 163 BE WARNING Continued If you intend to work underneath the vehicle you must secure the vehicle from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks the car jack is not sufficient risk of injury a
260. nfirms the deactiva tion of the daytime running lights gt Release the turn signal lever Activating daytime running lights on vehicles with the START STOP system gt Switch off the ignition gt Pull the turn signal lever Fig 22 on page 43 towards the steering wheel while simultaneously pushing it upwards and hold it in this position gt Switch on the ignition wait until the right turn signal light flashes 4x gt Switch off the ignition an audible signal sounds which confirms the activation of the daytime running lights gt Release the turn signal lever The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following condi tions are met v The ignition is switched on v The daylight driving lights function is activated J The light switch Fig 21 on page 41 is in position 0 Note When the daytime running light is switched on the side lights neither at the front nor the rear and the number plate lights are not lit Turn signal and main beam HONZA Operating lever Turn signal and D Sem main beam operation x __ gt ON CANCEL OFF First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Lever positions Fig 22 A Switch on right turn signal gt Switch on left turn signal Switch on main beam spring tensioned position 20 D Switch on main beam or headlamp flasher spring loaded position 20 The parking light can also be controlled with
261. nformation on the following subjects Opening the cover __ CZ Checking the battery electrolyte level SCT Charging 173 Replacing _ CS Disconnecting and reconnecting o gt T4 Automatic load deactivation S O T4 Warning symbols on the vehicle battery Always wear eye protection Battery acid is severely caustic Always wear gloves and eye protec tion Keep fire sparks open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the ve hicle battery When charging the vehicle battery a highly explosive gas mixture is produced Keep children away from the vehicle battery wy F warnine There is risk of injuries poisoning chemical burns explosions or fire when working on the battery and on the electrical system It is essential to comply with the general applicable safety rules as well as the warning instructions outlined below Keep children away from the vehicle battery a Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the bat tery vent openings Protect your eyes by wearing safety goggles or a face Shield risk of blindness a Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with the greatest of care Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs a Battery aci
262. ng Range The range indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the level of fuel in the tank and with the same style of driving as before The display is shown in steps of 10 km After lighting up of the indicator light i the display is shown in steps of 5 km The fuel consumption over the last 50 km is used to calculate the information The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner If the memory is set to zero after disconnecting the battery a fuel consumption of 10 100 km is calculated for the range afterwards the value is updated ac cording to the style of driving Distance travelled The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed If you want to measure the distance travelled from a particular moment in time reset the memory to zero at that moment in time page 25 Memory The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1999 km or 9 999 km on vehicles with a MAXI DOT display The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Average speed The average speed since the memory was last erased is displayed in km hour To determine the average speed over a certain period of time set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement page 25 Memory After erasing the memory no data will appear for the first 300 m driven The display is updated regularly while you are driving Current driving speed The current speed displayed is ide
263. ng 105 EPC Indicator light 19 ESC Function 11 Warning light 17 Exhaust inspection system Indicator light 18 F Fastening elements 65 Films 155 Fire extinguisher 183 First aid kit 182 Flashing 43 Flexible storage compartment 69 Fog lights 43 Indicator light 21 Fog lights with CORNER function 43 Footmats 101 see footmats 101 Force limit Power windows 40 Front airbag 137 Fuel 160 Diesel 162 Fuel gauge 12 refer to Fuel 160 Refuelling 160 Unleaded petrol 161 Fuel consumption 105 Fuel reserve Indicator light 19 Fuses Assignment 197 Assignment of fuses in the dash panel 198 Colour coding 19 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment _ 200 Replacing 197 Fuses in the engine compartment Assignment 200 G Gearbox Information messages 13 Gear change Gear recommendation 24 Information on the selected gear 24 Gear changing Gear stick 101 General view Cockpit 9 Generator Indicator light 15 Glasses storage box 62 Glow plug system Warning light 18 GSM 85 H Handbrake 100 Indicator light 14 Hazard warning light system 44 HBA 112 Head airbag 139 Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system 49 Headlights Bulb arrangement Driving abroad Headlight cleaning system Head restraint Heating Defrosting windows Exterior mirror 201 T10 49 53 78 50 77 operating Rear window Recirculated air mode Se
264. ng engine To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly If the steering is locked and it is impossible or difficult to turn the key into posi tion 2 Fig 90 move the steering wheel back and forth to unlock the steering ai Note We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle This acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car Starting the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 97 Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light oo illuminates after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine after the warning light om has gone out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating pe riod otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position P orN gt Switch on the ignition 2 Fig 90 on page 98 gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox until the engine starts gt Turn the key into position 3 to the stop and release immediately after the en gine has been started do not apply the accelerator After letting go the vehicle
265. ng through The water level must not reach above the bar on the lower beam Fig 99 gt Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the engine s air induction system or other parts of the ve hicle gt Never stop in the water do not reverse and do not switch the engine off gt Deactivate the START STOP system before driving through water page 116 START STOP FJ warnine a Driving through water mud sludge etc can impair the braking power and increase the braking distance risk of accident a Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking Only apply the brakes for the pur pose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy CAUTION a When driving through water some parts of the vehicle such as the engine gearbox chassis or electrics can be severely damaged a Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle a Potholes mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or im possible to drive through the body of water Do not drive through salt water The salt can lead to corrosion Any vehicle parts that have come into c
266. nleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98 In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane ratings 91 92 or 93 RON if petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available M Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol 98 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON or higher Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane ratings 91 92 or 93 RON if unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not availa ble H Fuel additives Unleaded petrol in accordance with the EN 228 standard meets all the condi tions for a smooth running engine We therefore recommend that no fuel addi tives are used This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system CAUTION a Even filling the tank with leaded petrol that does not meet the standards once can lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system a f a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards e g leaded petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Extensive damage to engine parts can occur We recom mend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage CAUTION a If in an emergency the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed the journey must only be continued at medium engine spe
267. ns and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains EJ warninec The following instructions for the use of tyres must be observed For the first 500 km new tyres do not yet provide optimum grip and appro priate care should therefore be taken when driving risk of accident Only use radial tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and tread pattern on all four wheels a For reasons of driving safety do not replace tyres individually a Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity for fitted tyres risk of accident a Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for fitted tyres risk of acci dent a Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling risk of acci dent BE WARNING Continued a Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged immediately re duce your speed and stop If no external damage is evident drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked Only use tyres or wheel rims that have been approved by KODA for your model of vehicle Failure to observe this instruction may impair the road safety of your vehicle risk of accident FJ warnine Observe the following information regarding tyre damage and wear a Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age a Never drive with damaged tyres risk of accident Imm
268. nserting the variable loading floor into the vehicle the luggage compart ment cover must not be in the parking position page 68 ae Note After removing the variable cargo floor place it down in such a way that it cannot be damaged or soiled Folding up down Fig 74 Fold up fold down variable loading floor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 70 The variable loading floor can be folded up in both positions upper and lower Folding up gt Grasp the variable loading floor at handle A Fig 74 gt Lift the variable loading floor in the direction of the arrow 1 until the folding corners B lock into place in area C Folding down gt Grasp the variable loading floor in the middle or at handle A gt Unlock the variable loading floor by pulling it in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 74 Parking position AND ETER ERNA z x VN ERE ER f o oO d tia Fig 75 Set parking position fold down from the parking position SS JBNH 0251 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 70 The variable loading floor can only be in set to the parking position when it is in the lower position page 72 and the luggage compartment cover has been taken out page 67 Folding up gt Remove the luggage compartment cover from the vehicle page 67 gt Grasp the variable loading floor at handl
269. ntical to the display on the speedometer 3 Fig 2 on page 10 Oil temperature If the engine oil temperature is in the range of 80 110 C the engine operating temperature has been reached If the oil temperature is lower than 80 C or above 110 C avoid high engine revs full throttle and high engine loads If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present the following is displayed instead of the oil temperature Warning at excessive speeds Set the speed limit e g for the maximum permissible speed in towns page 27 Warning at excessive speeds Warning at excessive speeds First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary gt Select the menu item Speed warning MAXI DOT display or segment dis play gt Activate the speed limit option by confirming this menu item gt Set the desired speed limit e g 50 km h gt Store the speed limit by confirming the set value or wait several seconds your settings will be saved automatically The speed limit can be adjusted from 30 km h to 250 km h in 5 km h increments Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving gt Select the menu item Speed warning MAXI DOT display or segment dis play gt Drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h gt Confirm the current speed as the speed
270. of the heating comfort Recirculated air mode Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 77 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle e g when driving through a tunnel or in a traffic jam Switching on off gt Press the symbol button The indicator light in the button lights up gt Press the symbol button lt again The indicator light in the button goes out Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control Fig 78 on page 78 is turned to position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this position by repeatedly pressing the symbol button gt F warnine Never leave recirculated air mode switched on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause driver and passenger fatigue reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up Increased risk of accident Switch off recir culated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements ss y 8O Adjusting 81 Recirculated air mode 81 The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met v The cooling system is switched on page 80 Control elements v The engine is running vZ The outside temperature is above approx 2 C J The blower switch is switched on positions 1 4 If the desired
271. olt power outlet Waste container Multimedia holder Storage compartment in the front arm rest 56 Using the system 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 62 Glasses storage box 62 Storage compartment on the passenger side Y 63 Clothes hook 63 Storage pockets on the front seats 64 Meshed pockets on the front seat backrests CS EI warnine a Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down when driving when accelerating or cornering and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic there is the risk of an accident a When driving ensure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes or operate the clutch or accelerator pedal risk of accident a No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the drinks holders the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something a Ash and cigarette or cigar stubs must only be discarded in ashtrays Car park ticket holder Fig 42 Parking ticket holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 The note holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets EJ WARNING The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s v
272. olyte level Cover Operation in winter Replacing Safety instructions 174 173 173 172 173 174 171 Vehicle care 147 Alcantara 158 Artificial leather 158 Cloths 158 Vehicle Condition See Auto Check Control 13 Vehicle data sticker 207 Vehicle dimensions 208 Vehicle height 208 vehicle identification number VIN 207 Vehicle key Locking 32 Unlocking 32 Vehicle length 208 Vehicle tool kit 183 Vehicle width 208 Vest Holder for reflective vest 57 Visibility 46 Visors see Sun visors 47 W Warning at excessive speeds 27 Warning triangle 182 Warranty 5 Washing 147 Automatic car wash system 153 by hand 152 Chrome parts 155 High pressure cleaner 153 Waste container 60 Water Driving through 109 Wax treatment See Taking care of your vehicle 154 Weights 207 Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel bolt Caps Loosening and tightening Wheel rims Wheels Bolts Changing Full trim General information Load index Replacing wheels Service life of tyres Snow chains Spare wheel Speed symbol Storing wheels Temporary spare wheel Tyre pressure Tyre sizes Tyre wear indicator Unidirectional tyres Winter tyres Window Interior mirror Windows De icing See Electrical power windows Windscreen washer fluid Checking Replenishing
273. on Fig 88 Correct seated position for the driver Fig 83 Adjustable steering wheel Lever below steering wheel This chapter contains information on the following subjects O A Adjusting the steering wheel position 96 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Power steering 97 ings H on page 96 E WARNING The height and forward back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted gt First of all adjust the driver s seat page 52 gt Swivel the lever underneath the steering wheel downwards Fig 89 gt Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position with regard to the height and forward back position gt Push the lever upwards to the stop a When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed a Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the a WARNING vehicle is stationary The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving so that the steering wheel cannot accidentally change position during the jour ney risk of accident 96 Driving Power steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings fj on
274. on P a Allow the engine to cool Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment risk of scalding Wait until no more steam or coolant is escaping FJ warninec The following instructions must be followed when working in the engine com partment m Keep children clear of the engine compartment a Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Do not touch any hot engine parts risk of burns a The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health a Avoid contact with the coolant Coolant vapours are harmful to health Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the en gine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir cover it with a cloth to protect your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot cool ant a f any coolant splashes into your eyes immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible BE WARNING Continued a Always store the coolant additive securely in its original container and in particular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning a f coolant is swallowed consult a doctor immediately Do not leave any items e g cloths or tools in the engine compartment a Never spill fluids on the hot engine Such fluids e g the antifreeze con tai
275. on page 14 If the warning light EPC lights up there is a fault in the engine control The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Diesel particle filter diesel engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a reg ular basis If the indicator light lights up soot has accumulated in the filter To clean the filter and where traffic conditions permit H drive as follows for at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light goes out gt 4 or 5 Gear engaged automatic transmission position S gt Vehicle speed at least 70 km h gt Engine speed between 1800 2500 rpm If the filter is properly cleaned the warning icon goes out If the filter is not properly cleaned the warning light does not go out and the warning light oo begins to flash The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Diesel particulate filter Log book The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode After switching the ig nition off and on again the indicator light the indicator light also lights up Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately EJ warnine a The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures Theref
276. on page 46 The sun visor for the driver or front passenger can be pulled out of the fixture and swivelled towards the door in the direction of the arrow 1 or 2 Fig 30 The driver or front passenger sun visor has a vanity mirror A or B with a cover Slide the cover in the direction of arrow 3 or 4 EI warninc The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deploy ment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head air bag is deployed m Lights and visibility 47 sunshade Rapid Spaceback Fig 31 Sun screen St AeA Iip AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 46 The interior can be lit through the panoramic roof tinted glass hereinafter only referred to as sun roof The panorama roof can be exposed or covered over with the sun screen Fig 31 In order to close the panorama roof completely the sun screen must be pushed into its end position Please pay attention to the following points if you wish to transport luggage or other items on the roof of your vehicle page 74 H in section Introduction CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating the windscreen wipers and washers 49 Headlight cleaning system 49 The windshield wipers and the windshield washer system only operate if the
277. onfirmed in the main menu page 27 MAXI DOT display On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display there is an option to fade out some of the information page 28 Settings E WARNING Concentrate fully on your driving at all times As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle a Even at outside temperatures of around 4 C black ice may still be present on the road surface You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tem perature display for an indication of whether there is black ice on the road 47 as Note a In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of meas ures a f the display of the second speed is activated in mph the current speed is not indicated in km h on the display a The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated Memory Fig 9 Multi function display Display example of the memory First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 The multifunction display is equipped with two automatic memories 1 and 2 The selected memory is shown in the display Fig 9 Single trip memory memory 1 The single trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ig nition is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is in
278. ontact with salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water Starting off and Driving 109 fi Note i Note After driving through water we recommend having the vehicle checked by a spe You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist ga cialist garage E rage a This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unleaded petrol 110 Headlights 110 In certain countries it may be possible that the SKODA Service Partner network is limited or has not been established This is the reason why procuring certain Spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able to make limited repairs Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 110 A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded pet rol page 161 Unleaded petrol Information regarding the locations of filling sta tions that offer unleaded petrol is for example provided by the automobile asso ciations a Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 110 The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle oncoming drivers In order to avoid this the headlights must be adj
279. ontrols safely and quickly gt Arelaxed and fatigue free body position gt Achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system EI warnine Information for the driver a Only adjust the driver s seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of accident a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as these may get caught in the pedal apparatus when driving or braking page 101 You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate EI warninc Information for the front passenger a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to proper ly protect you risk to life Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the dash panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury when braking or in the event of an accident If an airbag is deployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position FI WARNING General information Caution when adjusting the seat You may suffer injuries or bruises as a re gil Note After a certain time play can develop within the a
280. or days Information system 29 As soon as the service interval date has been reached the message Oil change now appears once the ignition has been switched on Inspection If an inspection is due the following message appears Inspection in km or days As soon as the service interval date has been reached the message Inspection now appears once the ignition has been switched on Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval You can view the remaining distance and days until the next service appointment at any time when the ignition is switched on by going to the Settings menu item page 28 or from the vehicle status in the main menu of the Maxi DOTdis play page 28 The following message is displayed for 10 seconds Oil change km days Inspection km days 30 Using the system Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle key 32 Unlocking locking with the key 32 Unlocking locking with the remote control 33 Safe securing system 33 Individual settings 34 Locking unlocking the vehicle from the inside 34 Child safety lock 35 Opening closing a door 35 Your car is equipped with a central locking system The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors the fuel filler flap and tailgate at the same time The safe securing system page 33 is integrated in the central locking syste
281. or the operation of your vehicle Information system 2 7 Main menu First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 27 Press and hold button A or C Fig 7 on page 22 to activate the MAIN MENU By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher Main menu items The following information can be selected depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle MFD Multifunction display page 25 Audio Operating instructions for the radio Navigation Operating instructions for the navigation system Phone page 85 Vehicle status page 13 Settings page 28 The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory fitted radio or navigation system is switched on i Note a If warning messages are displayed these messages must be verified to access the main menu page 22 Using the information system a f the display is not activated at that moment the menu always shifts to one of the higher levels after approx 10 seconds a Using the factory fitted radio or navigation system Radio operating instruc tions or navigation system operating instructions Settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 27 You can change certain settings by means of the MAXI DOT display The current menu item is shown in the top of the display under a line The following information can be s
282. orce limiter is switched on again 40 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Parking light and low beam 4 Daytime running lights DAY LIGHT 42 Turn signal and main beam 43 Fog lights 43 Fog lights with CORNER function 43 Rear fog light 44 Hazard warning light system 44 Parking light 45 Unless otherwise stated the lights only work when the ignition is switched on On models fitted with right hand steering the position of some of the controls differs from that shown in Fig 21 on page 41 The symbols which mark the po sitions of the controls are identical EJ wARNING The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with national legal requirements The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the lights Never drive with only the side lights on The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other oncoming traffic Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor 1 On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display the x symbol also lights up in the light switch i Note The headlights may mist up temporarily When the driving lights are switched on the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period although the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas This mist
283. ore do not park in areas where the hot filter can come into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials there is the risk of fire a Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traffic condi tions The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic CAUTION a As long as the warning light lights up one must take into account an in creased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine a Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the service life of the diesel particle filter A KODA Partner will be able to tell you which countries use diesel fuel with increased sulphur content Note To assist the combustion process of the soot particles in the filter we recom mend that regularly driving short distances be avoided a f the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after wards the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes fi Fuel reserve First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light will come on if the fuel level is less than 7 litres The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Please refuel Range km Note The text in the display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short distance Instruments and Indicator Light
284. ored again by pushing the rocker button B into the SET position Increasing the speed with the accelerator gt Depress the accelerator pedal Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed Decreasing the speed with the brake pedal The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal which temporarily deactivates the system page 115 Switching off temporarily First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 114 The cruise control system can be temporarily deactivated by pushing the switch A Fig 102 on page 115 into the spring mounted CANCEL position or by depress ing the brake or clutch pedal The set speed remains stored in the memory Briefly push the rocker button B into the RES position in order to resume the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released Assist systems 115 Note CO Introduction a f the driver s seat belt is removed for more than approx 30 seconds or the driv er s door is opened during stop mode on vehicles with manual transmission or au tomatic transmission when the selector lever in position P the engine must be Started manually a After manually starting the engine on vehicles with manual transmission auto This chapter contains information on the following subjects Starting shutting down the engine T6 matic engine shut down is not possible until the vehicle has
285. ot use the tow bar if it is not correctly inserted and secured in the mounting recess Do not use the towing device if it is damaged or if there are parts missing Do not modify or adapt the towing device in any way a Never release the tow bar while the trailer is still coupled LI CAUTION Take care when handling the tow bar so as to avoid damaging the paintwork on the bumper Fig 104 Carrier for the towing device tow bar First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 The tow bar can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel compartment or in a compartment for the spare wheel in the boot page 183 Explanation of graphic Ol gt 5 elle e 13 pin power socket Safety eyelet Mounting recess Cap Dust cap Tow ball Locking ball Centering Green marking on the handwheel Handwheel Key Lock cap Red marking on the handwheel White marking on ball bar Towing a trailer 119 Note On the bottom of the key is a code number If you lose a key please contact a specialist garage who will be able to use this code number to provide you with a new one Adjusting the ready position Fig 105 Setting the ready position Fig 106 Ready position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 119 Always adjust the ball head in the ready position before fitting gt Turn the key A in direction of the arrow
286. oth H Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution 2 table spoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water To remove stains use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose Treat the leather regularly and at suitable intervals using a suitable leather care product CAUTION a Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that no water gets into the seams Otherwise the leather could become brittle or cracked a Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from bleaching If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it a Sharp edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as a justified complaint a The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel 158 General Maintenance a Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular basis and each time after cleaning The cream nourishes the leather allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protection a Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible dis
287. ould be dam aged gt Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 132 to unlock the bonnet gt Grab hold of the bonnet and lift gt Take the bonnet support out of its holder 3 Fig 133 in the direction of the arrow and secure the opened bonnet by inserting the end of the support into the opening 4 Closing gt Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support Insert the bonnet sup port into the designated holder 3 Fig 133 gt Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 20 cm do not push it in FJ warnine Check that the bonnet is closed properly CAUTION Never open the bonnet using the release lever Fig 132 Engine compartment overview BNH 0002 Fig 134 Principle sketch Engine compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 162 1 Coolant expansion reservoir 169 2 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 165 3 Engine oil filler opening 168 4 Engine oil dipstick 167 5 Brake fluid reservoir 170 6 Vehicle battery 171 i Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical Radiator fan First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 162 The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor Operation is controlled accord ing to the tempera
288. out this is available from a SKODA Partner This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening closing the windows __ BD Force limit 40 The electrical power windows can only be operated when the ignition is switched on gt EJ WARNING a Ensure that no persons are still left in the vehicle when locking it In an emergency it will no longer be possible to open the windows from the inside a t is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors safety switch S if there are children in the rear seats Fig 20 on page 39 a The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter page 40 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres However the windows should be closed care fully risk of injury CAUTION Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric win dows a In the event that the windows are frozen first of all eliminate the ice page 155 Windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the electrical power windows Otherwise the window sealing and the electrical power window mechanism could be damaged a Make sure that the windows are closed whenever you leave the locked vehicle SA For the sake of the environment At high speeds you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily high fuel consumption it Note When driving always u
289. ove the load on the seat backrest do not lean on it pull the lever Fig 35 in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 36 and set the desired angle of the seat backrest with the back After releasing the lever C the seat backrest will remain in the set position Head restraints Fig 37 Head restraint adjusting removing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 52 Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head Setting the height gt Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as re quired gt To move the head restraint downwards press and hold the locking button A Fig 37 with one hand and push the head restraint downwards with the other hand Removing and installing head restraints gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as it will go gt Press the locking button A Fig 37 and pull out the head restraint gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button audibly clicks into place Removing and installing rear head restraints gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as it will go gt Press the locking button in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 37 while simulta neously pressing the locking button into the opening in the direction of the ar row 2 using
290. oved from old cars or have been recycled a Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle The airbags may then not be deployed properly or even at all in the event of an accident a No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system EI warnine A change to the vehicle s wheel suspension including the use of non ap proved wheels and tire combinations can alter the functioning of the airbag system risk of accident and fatal injury a Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Washing byhand ___ iP Automatic car wash systems 153 Washing with a high pressure cleaner 153 The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing How often the vehicle should be washed depends on factors such as gt Frequency of use gt Parking situation garage under trees etc gt Season gt Weather conditions gt Environmental influences 152 General Maintenance The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive effect can be High temperatures such as those caused by intensive sun s rays accentuate this caustic effect It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of th
291. p braking and fast cornering a Check the tyre pressure after driving for 10 minutes The sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into con tact with the skin SA For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in ac cordance with environmental protection regulations hia Note a Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions for the breakdown kit a Anew bottle of sealant can be purchased from KODA Original Parts a Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit or con sult a specialist garage about repair options Emergency equipment and self help 187 Breakdown kit Fig 154 Components of the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 187 The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compartment Components of the breakdown kit Fig 154 Valve remover Sticker with speed designation max 80 km h max 50 mph Inflation hose with plug Air compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core FE ele eee The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core This is the only way in which you can remove and re install the valve core from the tyre v
292. page 142 The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side air bag Fig 126 A There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag to ensure that the airbag can provide as much protection as possi ble Fig 126 B FI WARNING a Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags risk of injury Classification of child seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 142 Classification of child seats according to the ECE R 44 standard 144 Safety T ofthe child _ Weight of the child Approximate _Approximateage up to 10 kg up to 9 months up to 13 kg up to 18 months 9 18 kg up to 4 years 15 25 kg up to 7 years 22 36 kg over 7 years Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 142 Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Front passenger seat 0 up to 10 kg Rear seats Rear seat external centre 0 up to 13 kg J 9 18 kg 2 15 25 kg 3 22 36 kg U Universal child seat category a child seat designed to
293. page 82 gt Press the button A C The symbol A C pos 8 Fig 80 on page 82 appears in the display gt Press button A C once more The A C symbol in the display goes out After the cooling system is switched off only the ventilation function remains ac tive whereby the lowest temperature that can be reached is the outside temper ature Setting the temperature AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 82 Setting temperature gt Switch on the ignition gt Turn the control dial 1 Fig 80 on page 82 to the left or to the right to in crease or decrease the temperature The set temperature value appears in the display pos 2 Fig 80 on page 82 Switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit gt Press and hold the AUTO and A C buttons simultaneously The information appears in the display in the desired temperature measuring unit pos 3 Fig 80 on page 82 The interior temperature can be set between 18 C and 29 C The interior tem perature is regulated automatically within this range If you select the temperature below 18 C LO appears in the display If you select a temperature higher than 29 C HI appears in the display In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity respectively The temperature is not automatically regulated in this case CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out
294. peed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 114 gt Activate the cruise control system page 115 gt Drive at the desired speed gt Push the rocker button B into the SET Fig 102 on page 115 position After you have released the rocker button B from the SET position the speed you have just stored is kept constant without having to depress the accelerator Changing the stored speed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 114 Increasing the speed with the rocker button gt Push the rocker button B into the RES Fig 102 on page 115 position If the rocker button is held in the RES position the speed will increase continu ously Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory Decreasing the speed using the rocker button The stored speed can be reduced by pushing the rocker switch B into the SET Fig 102 on page 115 position If the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET position the speed will de crease continuously Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than approx 25 km h the speed is not stored and the memory is erased Once the speed of the vehicle has in creased to more than approx 25 km h the speed must then be st
295. pending on the regulator position for the heating or the air conditioning system and the at mospheric conditions On air outlet vents 3 and 4 Fig 77 the direction of air flow can be changed and the vents can also be opened or closed individually and the amount of airflow ad justed Set the air flow direction gt To adjust the height of the air flow turn the horizontal fins upward or down ward using the movable adjuster A Fig 77 gt To adjust the lateral direction of the air flow turn the vertical fins with the mov able adjuster A to the left or to the right Setting the amount of airflow gt Turn knob B Fig 77 upwards all the way to the stop to fully open the air out let gt Turn knob B downwards all the way to the stop to close the air outlet The knob can be adjusted to any position in between An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air out let Setting the direction of the air outlet Active air outlet vents Do not cover the air outlet vents with objects of any kind Using the cooling system economically First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 76 The air conditioning system compressor uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will affect the fuel consumption It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte rior has been strongly heated through the
296. r information page 16 Coolant CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet im pair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Fuel gauge BNH 0282 Fig 5 Fuel gauge First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 10 The instrument cluster can have one of the following types of fuel gauge Fig 5 A Instrument cluster with the MAXI DOT display B Instrument cluster with the segment display The fuel gauge only works if the ignition is switched on 12 Using the system The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres The warning light lights up when the amount of fuel reaches the reserve zone page 19 The reserve zone is indicated by the red area of the scale Fig 5 A or by display ing only the last two segments of the scale Fig 5 B in the magnifying glass CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine and the exhaust system Note a After filling up it can occur that during dynamic driving e g numerous Curves braking driving downhill and climbing a steep hill the fuel gauge indicates ap prox a fraction less When stopping or during less dynamic driving the fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again This is not a fault a The arrow
297. r steam jets the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed a The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 C risk of damaging the vehicle a See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high pressure clean er page 155 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork 154 Plastic parts 5S Rubber seals 155 Chrome parts 155 Decorative films _ 55 Windows and exterior mirrors 155 Headlight lenses 156 Door lock cylinders _ SSS O56 Cavity protection 156 Wheels 156 Underbody protection S 157 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relat ing to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork Vehicle care 153 We recommend using vehicle care products from SKODA Original Accessories These are available from SKODA Partners The usage instructions on the package must be observed EI WARNING a Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions a Always store vehicle care products safely in particular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning a Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housing
298. r the environment while driving eco nomically at the same time Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner s Manual that are marked amp below Work with us for the sake of the environment Navod k obsluze Rapid anglicky 11 2013 56 5610 04 20 5JA 012 720 AD
299. r vehicles without Electronic Stability Control ESC 112 Driving Electronic Differential Lock EDL First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 111 If one of the wheels starts to spin the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation on the brake of the wheel being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 111 The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking distance The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal In order to achieve the shortest possible braking distance the brake pedal must be applied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the HBA Hill Hold Control HHC First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 111 When driving on slopes HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal
300. radio navigation system Search backwards Fast rewind Extension cables to connect external sources are available from SKODA original accessories For a description of use refer to the operating instructions for the relevant radio or navigation system AUX input The AUX input is located in one of the following places gt Between the front seats in the centre console Fig 87 A gt On the front of the Amundsen navigation system gt Multi Device Interface MDI input If vehicles are equipped with the MDI input this will be located above the storage compartment in the front centre console Fig 87 B External sources such as iPod iPad or iPhone connected to the MDI input can be operated via your unit When the ignition is on and a device is connected via a connecting cable the de vice battery is charged Communication and multimedia 95 I WARNING Continued Driving a Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A Fig 88between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a f the steering wheel is adjusted further towards the head the protection provided by the driver airbag in the event of an accident is reduced Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest CQ Introduction Adjusting the steering wheel positi
301. rage area is being loaded and unloa ded Fastening elements HONS9 Lashing eyes and fastening ele ments N First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 The following fastening elements are located in the boot Fig 59 A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets Fastening element and eyelet only for fastening fixing nets page 66 Seats and useful equipment 65 CAUTION The maximum permissible static load of the individual lashing eyes A is 3 5 kN 350 kg i Note The front eyelet B is located behind the folding rear seat backrest Fig 59 Fixing nets Fig 61 Fastening vertical pocket BNH 0214 66 Using the system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 Examples for attaching the fixing nets Fig 60 A Horizontal pocket Floor net Vertical pocket EI WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1 5 kg Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of net damage Sia e BNH 0045 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 64 Hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are provided on both sides of the boot Fig 62 l CAUTION The maximu
302. ravelling and the weight of the object Example In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h an object with a weight of 4 5 kg produces an energy which corresponds to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg Luggage compartment light The light comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened If the lid remains open for more than 10 minutes the boot light switches off automatically FJ warnine a Store the objects in the boot and attach them to the lashing eyes Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants danger of death a Please note that transporting heavy objects alters the handling properties of the vehicle due to the displacement of the centre of gravity risk of acci dent The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly a f the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with un suitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents To prevent items of luggage from moving around always use suitable lashing straps that are firmly attached to the lashing eyes The transported items must be stowed in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward on sudden driving or braking manoeuvres risk of injury a When transporting objects
303. re not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Deployment factors It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits hard soft the impact angle vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which oc curs The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the rele vant restraint system If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision re mains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the air bags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision gt Driver s front airbag gt Front passenger airbag The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision gt Front side airbag on the side of the accident gt Head airbags on the side of the accident In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed gt the interior lighting comes on if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position gt the hazard warning light is switched on gt all the doors are unlocked gt
304. rectly fasten the seat belt page 130 Using seat belts In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated page 139 Deactivating airbags Front passenger adjustment page 53 Adjusting the front seats Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 127 To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an ac cident the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following gt Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the top of your head B Fig 113 on page 128 page 128 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 130 Using seat belts gt Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi cle page 142 Transporting children safely Examples of incorrect seated positions First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 127 Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if seat belts are fastened correctly Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers especially children Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following
305. relating to copyright laws Subject to change Issued by KODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO a s 2013 SKODA Service App SKODA Service in your pocket The SKODA Service application is designed for smartphones operating on iOS and Andriod systems and its purpose is to help SKODA AUTO customers in any difficult situation they may encounter on their travels My dealer choose your nearest or preferred Service Centre Assistance contact the Assistance Service or your favourite dealer My car complete Owner s Manual and summary list of all control lamps for quick review SKODA Manual App Know your vehicle The SKODA Manual application aims on users of tablet PCs who are interested in SKODA vehicles or already own one The application contains full featured digital version of the Owner s Manual for all current SKODA models Navigation through the list of content gt Classical reading page by page gt Full text search throughout the whole manual gt Bookmarks for fast access to favourite chapters Available to download from AppStore for iOS and Google Play for Android www skoda auto com You also can do something for the environment The fuel consumption of your SKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle This Owner s Manual shows you how to use your SKODA vehi cle with utmost care fo
306. ressure too low page 16 Check engine oil level engine oil sensor defective a al Problem with the engine oil pressure page 13 Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot page 13 lA Problem with the engine oil pressure If the A symbol is shown in the MAXI DOT display you must have your vehicle checked immediately by a specialist garage The information about the maximum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol i Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot A lt i symbol in the MAXI DOT display indicates that the temperature of the auto matic gearbox DSG clutches is too high The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Gearbox overheated Stop Log book Instruments and Indicator Lights 13 do not continue to drive Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the icon goes out risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the symbol disappears EI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights page 44 The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed dis tance observe the national legal provisions when doing so pia Note f the MAXI DOT display shows warning messages these messages must be confirmed in order to access the main menu page 22 Using the information
307. rom mode P or N selector lever lock The selector lever is locked in modes P and N to prevent the forwards travel mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster page 21 The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while while simulta neously pressing the lock button Fig 94 The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving via position N e g from R to D This for example helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck e g in a bank of snow The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for more than approx 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds up to 5 km h Note If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa move the selector lever quickly This prevents modes R or N from being accidentally se lected Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic Fig 95 Selector lever Manual shifting of gears BNH 0242 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 101 Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears on the selector lever This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving The currently selected gear is indicated in the display Fig 93 on page 102 The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 24
308. rrupt traffic report 3 Press and hold button No function Fast forward No function Switch to previous channel Switch to start of track No function 4 Press briefly Interrupt traffic report Communication and multimedia 93 Button adjust ment Action Audio sources Navigation wheel Fig 85 Press and hold button No function Rewind No function Switch to the previous station and at Turn upwards the same time Skip to next track display list of saved available stations Show the option to stop navigation or Switch to the next station and at the display the list of recent destinations Turn downwards same time Switch to start of track display list of saved available stations Press briefly Call up the main menu 8 To go to the previous track press the adjustment wheel twice or rotate it by two positions Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel Version 2 The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices A Ugh a6 description is included in the relevant operating instructions Multifunction steering wheel a i Navigation control buttons If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or navi gation system The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons BNH 0004 Co First read
309. ry information and safety warn ings H on page 56 The cigarette lighter is located in the front centre console Fig 48 Using the system gt Press in the button of the cigarette lighter gt Wait until the button pops forward gt Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use gt Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket F warnine a Take care when using the cigarette lighter Improper usage can cause burns The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn Therefore never leave children unattended in the ve hicle Note a The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12Volt socket for electrical ap pliances page 60 12 volt power outlet a Further information page 149 Service work adjustments and technical alter ations Ashtray Fig 49 Ashtrays front rear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 The ashtray can be used for discarding ash cigarettes cigars and the like H Removing gt Pull the ashtray Fig 49 out and upwards Installing gt Insert the ashtray vertically FJ WARNING Never place flammable objects in the ashtray risk of fire l CAUTION When removing do not hold the ashtray at the cover risk of breakage Seats and useful equipment 59 12 volt power outlet Fig 50 12 Volt power socket First read and observe the introductory informatio
310. s Replacing the battery in the remote control key 193 Synchronising the remote control 194 CAUTION The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat tery When replacing the battery pay attention to the correct polarity SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions Replacing the battery in the remote control key Fig 159 Remove cover take out battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 193 The battery is located under a cover A Fig 159 We recommend having the key batteries replaced by a specialist garage Howev er if you would like to replace the discharged battery yourself proceed as follows gt Flip out the key gt Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the region of the arrows 1 gt Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in the region of the arrow 2 gt Insert the new battery gt Place the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place it Note The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the remote control key after replacing the battery page 194 a f a key has an affixed decorative cover this will be destroyed when the battery is replaced A replacement cover can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Emerge
311. s 19 t Airbag system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the airbag system The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Error Airbag The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically includ ing when one of the airbags is switched off If a front side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using the vehicle system tester gt The indicator light lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switch ed on and then flashes for around 12 seconds The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Airbag belt tensioner deactivated If the air bag was switched off using the key operated switch on the side of the dash panel on the passenger side gt The indicator light comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on gt Switched off airbags are indicated by the indicator light OFF 3 in the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 2 logo lighting up in the middle of the dash panel Fig 123 on page 140 EI WARNING If there is a fault have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident D Tyre inflation pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light 1 lig
312. s are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen Do not switch on the ignition if the front wiper arms are retracted The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and while doing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet i Note a Keep the wiper blades clean They may become soiled e g with wax residues after washing in automatic car wash systems page 153 a The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx 10 C Activating the windscreen wipers and washers Fig 32 Operating lever Windscreen wipers and washer settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 Operating lever positions Fig 32 Wipers off Interval windscreen wiping slow windscreen wiping rapid windscreen wiping Flick windscreen wiping service position of the wiper arms page 195 spring loaded position Automatic wipe wash for windscreen spring tensioned position Wiping the rear window pane the windscreen wiper wipes at regular inter vals after a few seconds Automatic wipe wash for the rear window spring tensioned position Switch for setting the desired interval between the individual windscreen wipes 1 Interval windscreen wiping lel lee FIN Automatic wipe wash for windscreen The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wipers wipe somewhat
313. s can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim a f the wheel bolts are handled incorrectly the wheel may come loose when the car is moving risk of accident EI WARNING Observe the following information regarding the spare wheel Only use the spare wheel for as long as is necessary Never drive with more than one spare wheel attached The snow chains cannot be used on the spare wheel l CAUTION a f a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres the following must be observed page 179 Spare wheel a Protect the tyres from contact with oil grease and fuel a Replace lost valve caps a f in the event of a puncture it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre without a dedicated running direction or with the opposite direction of rotation drive carefully as the optimal characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situation S2 For the sake of the environment Tyres that are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption a We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe cialist garage We recommend that you use wheel rims tyres full wheel trims and snow chains from SKODA Original Accessories 176 General Maintenance Service life of tyres Fig 141 Principle sketch Tyre tread with wear indicators open fuel filler flap with a table detailing the tyre sizes and tyre inflation pressures Fig 142
314. s or the wheel trims risk of cuts CAUTION a Do not use any insect sponges rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod ucts risk of damaging the paintwork surface a Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned SA For the sake of the environment Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regula tions Note Due to the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any potential prob lems with the cleaning and care of your vehicle s exterior we recommend that the cleaning and care of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 153 Minor paint damage such as scratches scuffs or stone chips should be treated im mediately if possible using touch up pens or sprays 154 General Maintenance Preserving the vehicle paintwork A thorough wax treatment provides the vehicle s paintwork with highly effective protection against harmful environmental influences The vehicle must be treated with a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body work after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still r
315. s otherwise serious engine damage may occur Capacity First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 168 Coolant capacity in litres Petrol engines 1 2 1 55 kW 1 2 1 63 77 kW TSI 1 4 1 90 kW TSI 1 6 1 77 kW Filling level Diesel engine Filling level 1 6 1 66 77 kW TDI CR 6 5 Checking the coolant level Fig 137 Engine compartment Coolant expansion reservoir aa fs BHN 0008 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 168 The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment Inspecting the coolant level gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank Fig 137 Coolant level above mark A No coolant may be added The level may also rise slightly above the A marking when the engine is hot Coolant level between markings A and Coolant may be added The coolant level must lie between the A and B markings when the engine is cold Coolant level below mark Coolant must be added Top up the coolant level to between the A and B markings when the engine is cold If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low this is indicated by the indicator light amp page 16 amp Coolant lighting up in the instrument cluster We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time
316. s switched on when the ignition is switched off or if one of the doors is open the light will automatically go out after around 10 minutes Fig 26 Interior lighting version 2 Fig 25 Front interior lighting version 1 IBNH 0069 Slide switch positions Fig 26 switching on 0 switching off control using the door contact switch middle position Slide switch positions a Fig 25 The same principles apply for interior lighting version 2 as for page 45 Front in terior lighting version 1 5 switching on 0 switching off middle position Control with the door contact switch Lights and visibility 45 Applies to vehicles without the panoramic roof Fig 27 Rear interior lighting B5J 0070 The rear interior lighting is operated together with the front interior lighting gt When the front interior lighting is switched on the rear interior lighting also turns on automatically gt When the front interior lighting is switched off the rear interior lighting can be turned on off as required Switching on off gt Press the Fig 27 button D This function only applies to certain countries In some countries the light at the rear is controlled independently from the light at the front 2 In this position the same rules apply to this light as for the front interior light page 45 Front interi or lighting version 1 46 Using the system Applies to vehicles
317. safety push button S again If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated the warning light 4 in the safe ty switch S lights up Unlocking and opening 39 Note The window lift mechanism is equipped with protection against overheating Re peated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to over heat If this happens it will not be possible to operate the window for a short time You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating protection has cooled down Force limit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 38 The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window opens by a few centimetres If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec onds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window opens by sev eral centimetres If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time even though the obstacle was not yet been re moved the closing process is only stopped The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds the window will now close with full force If you wait longer than 10 seconds the f
318. se the existing heating air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds Opening closing the windows MB BNH 0164 Fig 20 Buttons on the driver s door in the rear doors First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 38 Buttons for the electrical power windows Fig 20 A Button for electrical power window of the driver s door Button for electrical power window of the front passenger door Button for power window at the rear right door D Button for power window at the rear left door S Safety pushbutton Opening gt The window can be opened by pressing lightly on the corresponding button The opening process stops when one releases the button Additionally the driver s window can be opened automatically fully open by pressing the button to the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the win dow to stop immediately Closing gt The window can be closed by pulling lightly on the top corner of the corre sponding button The closing process stops when one releases the button Safety pushbutton The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by pressing the safety switch S Fig 20 The buttons for the electrical power windows at the rear doors are activated again by pressing the
319. sensitive objects in the glasses storage box they may be damaged Closing g ee The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 0 25 kg gt Fold the lid of the storage box back in the opposite direction to the ar row Fig 54 until it audibly clicks into place Glasses storage box Fig 55 Opening the glasses storage box BNH 0227 62 Using the system Storage compartment on the passenger side Fig 56 Open tray control air supply First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 Opening gt Pull the lid handle in the direction of the arrow Fig 56 A and fold down the lid Closing gt Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place Air supply gt Turn the control dial Fig 56 B anti clockwise to open the air supply gt Turn the control dial clockwise to close the air supply Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the storage compartment Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or inte rior air to flow into the storage compartment We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cool ing system for the storage compartment is not being used F WARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea sons i Note a A1 litre bottle max capacity can be
320. ses gt The tyre inflation pressure is low gt The structure of the tyre is damaged gt The vehicle is loaded on one side gt The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily e g when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill gt Snow chains are mounted gt The spare wheel is mounted gt One wheel per axle was changed EJ WARNING a When the warning light illuminates immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressure a Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the warning light 1 may light up after a delay or not at all LI CAUTION The tyre control display does therefore not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control as the system cannot detect an even loss of pressure a The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss e g in case of sudden tyre damage In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements or sharp braking To ensure a proper functioning of the tyre control display it is necessary to re peat the basic setting every 10 000 km or once a year Spare wheel Fig 144 Boot Spare wheel B3T 0429 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 175 The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering
321. si tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No ac cessories such as cup holders should be attached to the doors a f children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident This can re sult in serious injuries page 142 Child seat EI warnine a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth ing a Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by SKODA In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non ap proved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag a Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage cracks or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the mod ules Head airbags Fig 122 Location of the head airbag gas filled head airbag Co First read and o
322. side temperature is displayed For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display this information is always shown Driving time The time travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time reset the memory to zero at that point in time page 25 Memory The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and on vehicles which are fitted with a MAXI DOT display it is 99 hours and 59 minutes The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Current fuel consumption The current fuel consumption level is displayed in litres 100 km You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consumption 1 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre 2 On some models in certain countries km ltr is displayed when the vehicle is stationary 26 Using the system The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is displayed in litres 100 km If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time you must set the memory at the start of the new measurement to zero page 25 Memory After erasing the memory no value is displayed until you have driven approx 300 m The display is updated regularly while you are drivi
323. stored in the storage compartment on the front passenger s side a When the storage compartment is opened a light lights up Clothes hook First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar and on the handle of the head liner above each of the rear doors F WARNING a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing this may re duce the effectiveness of the head airbags Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg Seats and useful equipment 63 Storage pockets on the front seats Fig 57 Map pockets First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 56 Pockets for storing maps magazines etc are provided on the back of the front seat backrests Fig 57 EI warnine Never put heavy items into the map pockets risk of injury CAUTION Never put large objects into the map pockets e g bottles or objects with sharp edges risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings Meshed pockets on the front seat backrests Fig 58 Meshed pocket BNH 0131 64 Using the system First read and observe the introductory information and safety war
324. switched on The following message for example may be shown in the MAXI DOT display INFORMATION Check front right low beam The rear side lights and the licence plate lighting have several light bulbs The in dicator light only lights up if all bulbs in the parking light in one rear light or the licence plate lighting are faulty For this reason regular check that these light bulbs are working correctly Exhaust inspection system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the exhaust inspection system The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately oo Glow plug system diesel engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The indicator light oo lights up after the ignition has been switched on Once the light has gone out the engine can be started immediately There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light oo does not come on at all or lights up continuously If the warning light o gt begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately EPC Engine performance check petrol engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J
325. t be deactivated Deactivating the front passenger airbag E PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Sy Fig 123 Key switch for front passenger airbag warning light for front pas senger airbag activation deactivation AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 139 Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 Fig 123 OFF gt After switching on the ignition check whether the warning light 3 OFF amp is illu minated in writing PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is illuminated in the centre panel Switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 Fig 123 ON gt Close the storage box on the front passenger s side gt After switching on the ignition check whether the warning light 3 OFF 3 is not illuminated in writing PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 7 is not illuminated in the centre panel EI warnine The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off a Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag a f the OFF 2 warning light is flashing the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in an accident Have the airbag system checked by a spe
326. t of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 162 a Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage a If the oil level is above level A Fig 136 on page 167 do not continue to drive Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage CAUTION Do not pour any additives into the engine oil risk of serious damage to the en gine parts Note a Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle a We recommend that you use oils from KODA Original Accessories a If your skin has come into contact with oil it must be washed thoroughly Specifications and capacity First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 166 Specifications and capacity in I for vehicles with flexible service intervals 1 2 1 55 kW VW 503 00 VW 504 00 1 2 1 63 kW TSI VW 504 00 1 2 1 77 kW TSI VW 504 00 1 4 1 90 kW TSI VW 503 00 VW 504 00 Diesel engine Specification Filling level 1 6 1 66 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF Specifications and capacity in I for vehicles with fixed service intervals Pe
327. t on the front passenger side 63 Air outlet vents 76 Cockpit 9 CQ Introduction 40 Pat QS Vmin x 100 4 N 4 Q NN This chapter contains information on the following subjects Overview 10 We i y 90 TI F f Revolution counter 10 T LER age Display 11 L130 Speedometer 11 Coolant temperature gauge T Fuel gauge 12 Counter for distance driven 12 Fig 2 Instrument cluster Digital clock 13 Display of the second speed 13 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Auto Check Control 13 ings Hl on page 10 When the ignition is on the instrument cluster is illuminated 1 Revolutions counter with warning lights page 11 Display page 11 Fault display z Pan With counter for distance driven page 12 With service interval display page 28 With digital clock page 13 with multifunction display MFA page 25 With information system page 22 Speedometer with warning lights page 11 If there is a fault in the instrument cluster the Error message will appear in the display Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist garage vvv Vv v EI warnine Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for road safety Coolant temperature gauge page 11 Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving only Button for display mode when the
328. t the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number Communication and multimedia 89 Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item User Overview of the stored telephones New user Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range Visibility Switches on the visibility of the hands free system for other devices Media player Playback via Bluetooth Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices Search Device search Phone name option to change the name of the phone default SKODA_BT Settings The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item Telephone book Phonebook Update Update the phone book List Arrange the entries in the phone book Surname Arrange according to surname First name Arrange according to first name Ring tone Ring tone setting Back Return in the Start menu of the telephone CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Dialogue version 1 90 Dialogue version2 _ ST Voice commands 92 1 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsent navigation system 90 Using the system Dialogue version 1 BIT 0173 Fig 83 Multifunction steering wheel Voice control Co First read and observe
329. ted at the bottom of the B pillar on the driver s side The type plate lists the following weights Maximum permissible gross weight 9 Maximum permissible towed weight towing vehicle and trailer Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome This number is al so located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code Engine number The engine number three digit identifier and serial number is stamped on the engine block Operating weight The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only This value repre sents the minimum operating weight without additional weight increasing equip ment such as air conditioning system spare wheel or trailer hitch Technical data 207 The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver 75 kg the weight of the operating fluids the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 capacity It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the operating weight H The payload consists of the following components gt Passengers gt All items of luggage and other loads gt Roof load including roof rack system gt Equipment not included in t
330. ted menu item Press and hold button Continuously display first letter of the phone book Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book Press briefly Return to a previous level in the menu Press and hold button Exit telephone menu ES e S E a The symbol The gt symbol means briefly press button again Control telephone from the multifunction steering wheel Version 2 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ai ings H on page 85 Multifunction steering wheel g pag Control buttons for the tele To minimize driver distraction when operating the telephone the basic tele Boone phone s functions can be set by simply operating the buttons located on the steering wheel Fig 82 This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal telephone preinstallation hands free system at the factory If the parking light is switched on the buttons and symbols are also switched on t4 and z illuminated on the multifunction steering wheel BNH 0003 Button adjust ment Action Operation wheel Fig 82 1 Press briefly Accept call terminate call entry in the main menu of the telephone list of selected numbers 1 Press and hold button Reject call last number dialled switch voice control on off 2 Press briefly Switch on off voice control
331. tem must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel risk of accident The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions a Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the system being switched on unintentionally CAUTION The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with steeper gradients The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels In such cases select a lower gear or brake the vehicle using the footbrake a The cruise control system cannot be activated when first gear or reverse gear is selected vehicles with manual transmission a The cruise control system cannot be activated when the selector lever is in po sitions P N or R vehicles with automatic transmission The cruise control system may automatically switch off when some brake assist systems e g ESC intervene when the maximum permissible engine speed is ex ceeded etc Activating deactivating Fig 102 Operating lever Cruise control yo Oo C system controls ON CANCEL OFF 20 4 OA lt gt OXY pe First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 114 Activating gt Move switch A Fig 102 into the ON position Deactivating gt Move switch A Fig 102 into the OFF position Storing and maintaining s
332. tems 111 The TCS should normally always be enabled The system should be deactivated only in the following situations for example gt When driving with snow chains gt When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface gt When rocking a car free when it has become stuck Ensure the TCS is activated again afterwards Antilock Braking System ABS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 111 ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking Thus helping the driver to main tain control of the vehicle The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises When the ABS system is active do not brake periodically or reduce the pressure on the brake pedal Traction Control System TCS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 111 If the wheels are slipping the TCS adapts the engine speed to the conditions of the road surface The TCS makes it much easier to start off accelerate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable The TCS function is activated automatically each time the ignition is switched on If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system the ASR is integrated into the ESC system page 111 During an intervention of the system the TCS warning light amp 9 flashes in the in strument cluster D Valid fo
333. terrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Total trip memory memory 2 The total trip memory collates the data from any number of individual trips up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or a 1999 km distance or for vehicles with a MAXI DOT display 99 hours and 59 minutes or a 9999 km distance The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation Starts all over again Unlike the single trip memory the total trip memory is not deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours Select memory gt Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display page 22 Using the information system Confirm the element again to switch between the individual memories Information system 25 Reseting gt Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display page 22 Using the information system gt Select the desired memory gt Press and hold button B or adjustment wheel D Fig 7 on page 22 The following values of the selected memory are set to zero gt Average fuel consumption gt Distance driven gt Average speed gt Driving time Note Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data Information overview First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 25 The amount of information displayed may differ depending on the equipment Outside temperature The current out
334. th longer wait times Even after just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions though are particularly high in the warming up phase Therefore start driving as soon as the engine has started though high engine speeds should be avoided Avoiding short distances 1 100km Fig 98 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in 1 100 km at different tem peratures 15 25 30 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Short distances result in an above average high fuel consumption We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start Fuel consump tion drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The consumption stabilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating tempera ture An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature The im age Fig 98 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a cer tain distance at a temperature of 20 C and at a temperature of 10 C The vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in winter than in summer Checking tyre inflation pressure First read and observe the introductory information and
335. the remote control key be used again EI WARNING a Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle even if it is only for a short time This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle Otherwise children might start the engine or operate electrical equipment e g power windows risk of injury Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has come to a stop The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally risk of accident 32 Using the system CAUTION a Each key contains electronic components therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean Impurities textile fibres dust etc have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and igni tion lock a The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than approx 3 metres away page 193 i Note If you lose a key please contact a specialist garage which will be able to provide you with a new one Unlocking locking with the key Fig 12 Left side of the vehicle Turning the key for unlocking and lock ing the vehicle BNH 0180 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 31 Unlocking gt Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the direction of travel unlocking position A
336. this Owner s Manual carefully because operation in accordance with these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle If you have any questions about your vehicle please contact a KODA Partner We hope you enjoy driving your SKODA and wish you a pleasant journey at all times Your SKODA AUTO ass hereinafter referred to only as SKODA or manufacturer Terms used The on board literature contains the following terms relating to the service work for your vehicle gt Specialist garage a company that carries out specialist service tasks for SKODA vehicles A specialist can be a SKODA Partner a SKODA Service Partner or an independent workshop gt KODA Service Partner A workshop that has been contractually authorized by the manufacturer KODA AUTO a s or its sales partner to perform service tasks on SKODA vehicles and to sell SKODA Genuine Parts gt KODA Partner A company that has been authorized by the manufacturer SKODA AUTO ass or its sales partner to sell new SKODA vehicles and when ap plicable to service them using SKODA Genuine Parts and to sell SKODA Genuine Parts Owner s Manual These operating instructions apply to all body variants of the vehicle and to all related models This Owner s Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identify ing them as special equipment model variants or market dependent equipment Consequently your vehicle does not need to
337. ting deactivating 8 Interior monitor and towing protection 36 The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against vehicle break ins If an attempt is made to break into the vehicle the system triggers au dible and visual warning signals hereafter referred to only as alarm An alarm is triggered when the following monitored areas of the vehicle have a fault gt Bonnet gt Boot lid gt Doors gt Ignition lock gt Vehicle inclination page 36 gt Interior of car page 36 gt Adrop in voltage of the on board power supply gt Socket of the factory fitted towing device page 124 Driving with a trailer An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon nected while the alarm system is activated The alarm is switched off by unlocking the vehicle or switching on the ignition CAUTION Before leaving the vehicle check that the doors and windows are closed in order to ensure that the anti theft alarm system is fully operational i Note The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years 36 Using the system Activating deactivating First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 36 Activating The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked If the vehicle is unlocked and a door or the boot lid not opened within the next 30 seconds the vehicle will lock again
338. trol engines Specification Filling level 1 2 1 55 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 2 1 63 kW TSI VW 502 00 1 2 1 77 kW TSI VW 502 00 1 4 1 90 kW TSI VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 6 1 77 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can be used once for refilling Diesel engine Specification Filling level 1 6 1 66 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can be used once for refilling CAUTION Only the above mentioned oils can be used on vehicles with flexible service inter vals We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil In exceptional cases a maximum of 0 5 of specification VW 502 00 only for petrol engines or specification VW 505 01 only for diesel engines engine oil can be used to refill once Other engine oils must not be used risk of engine damage Checking the oil level Fig 136 Dipstick First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 166 The dipstick indicates the engine oil level Fig 136 Checking the oil level Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt Switch off the engine W
339. ttery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light amp comes on after switching on the ignition If the indicator light does not go out after moving a short distance this means that there is an error in the system Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately t Traction Control System ASR First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light flashes c to show that the ASR is currently operating If the warning light t9 comes on immediately after starting the engine the ASR can be switched off for technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the warning light to does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ASR is fully functional again If the warning light cc lights up there is a fault in the ASR The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Error Traction control ASR Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Further information page 112 Traction Control System TCS Note If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected the indicator light comes on after switching on the ignition If the indicator light does not go out after moving a short distance this means that there is an error in the system Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Instruments and Indicator Lights 17 Antilock brake system ABS First read and observe the introductory informatio
340. ttle If the engine is hot the cooling system is pressurized risk of scalding It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap Do not touch the radiator fan The radiator fan may switch itself on auto matically even if the ignition is off Power steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 If the indicator light lights up there is a fault in the power steering system The power steering operates with reduced steering assist or does not function at all Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately 2 Electronic Stability Control ESC First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 14 The warning light flashes amp to show that the ESC is currently operating If the warning light 5 comes on immediately after you start the engine the ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the indicator light 2 does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ESR is fully functional again If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the ESC system The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display O Error Electronic Stability Control ESC or Error Traction control ASR Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately Further information page 111 Electronic Stability Control ESC Note If the vehicle s ba
341. ture of the coolant E WARNING After switching off the ignition the fan may intermittently continue to oper ate for approx 10 minutes Windscreen washer system ji Fig 135 YVAN X Engine compartment Wind screen washer fluid reservoir g First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 162 The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the head lights Inspecting and replenishing 165 The filling level of the container is about 3 5 litres and about 5 4 litres on vehicles that have a headlight washing system Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights We recommend using clean water together with a screen cleaner from the range of SKODA Original Accessories with antifreeze in winter which will remove any stubborn dirt In Winter the washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze even if the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles Under exceptional circumstances methylated spirits can also be used if no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 The freeze protection at this concentration is sufficient only to 5 C CAUTION a Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windscreen washer fluid a If the veh
342. u in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connec tion is completed by inputting a PIN number If the authorisation input is required it must always be performed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection 2 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsent navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system 3 This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 85 The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu gt Telephone book gt Dial number gt Call lists gt Voice mailbox gt Bluetooth gt Settings gt Back Telephone book The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone memory and the mobile phone SIM card Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item The re quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel You can select digits 0 9 sym bols and the Cancel Call and Delete functions Call lists The following menu items can be selected in the Call list menu item Missed calls Dialled numbers Received calls Voice mailbox In the Voice mailbox menu item you can se
343. ugh a SKODA Service Partner outside the European Economic Area and Switzerland One of the conditions for service from the SKODA warranty is that all service work has been carried out in a timely and adequate manner and in accordance with the manufacturer s provisions It must be proven that service work has been carried out properly and in accordance with the manufacturer s provisions when raising a claim from the SKODA warranty In the event of a missed service or failure to carry out a service according to the manufacturer s provisions you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you can prove that the missed service or the failure to carry out a service according to the manufacturer s provisions was not the cause of the fault Natural wear and tear to your vehicle is not covered by the SKODA warranty The SKODA warranty also does not cover faults to bodywork installations or conver sions provided by third parties or vehicle faults caused as a result The same ap plies to accessories that are not factory installed and or delivered In addition this warranty does not apply if the fault was caused by one of the fol lowing gt Unauthorized use improper handling e g use in racing competitions or over loading improper care and maintenance or unapproved modification to your vehicle gt Non compliance with provisions in the service schedule and the Owner s Man ual or other factory supplied instructions gt External ca
344. umption increases during the winter or under difficult condi tions on poor roads etc Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer s data as a result of outside temperatures weather and driving style Such an engine speed should be adhered to when accelerating in order to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle Starting off and Driving 105 CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Looking ahead First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating therefore unnec essary accelerating and braking should be avoided If looking ahead when driving less braking and consequently less accelerating are required If possible let your vehicle coast to a stop or use the engine brake if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red for example Economical gear changing Fig 96 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km depending on the selected gear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 105 Shifting up early saves on fuel Manual gearbox gt Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear gt Shift up into the next gear at approx 2000 rpm An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early Observe th
345. unctioning properly gt Check the tyre inflation pressure gt Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside gt Secure all items of luggage page 64 gt Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals gt Adjust the mirrors the front seat and head restraint to your body size gt Advise your passengers to adjust the head restraints to their body size gt Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 142 Transporting children safely gt Adopt the correct seated position page 127 Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position gt Correctly fasten the seat belt Also inform passengers to fasten the seat belt correctly page 130 What influences the driving safety First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 126 The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your driving safety is effected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk The following guidelines must therefore be observed gt Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your passengers or mobile phone calls gt Never drive when your driving ability is impaired e g due to medication alcohol or drugs gt Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit gt Always adjust the driving speed to the road traffic and weather conditions gt Take regular
346. ur tyres and wheel rims for damage punctures cuts splits and bulges etc on a regular basis Remove foreign bodies e g small stones from the tyre tread immediately Replacing wheels If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres we recommend replac ing the front wheels with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram Fig 142 You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres We recommend that you swap the tyres every 10 000 km in order to achieve even Wear on all tyres and to ensure optimal service life for the tyres Storing tyres Identify disassembled tyres so that the previous direction of rotation can be maintained if the tyres are reassembled Always store wheels or tyres in a cool dry place that is as dark as possible Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres has 1 6 mm high wear indicators installed These wear indicators are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre depending on the make Fig 141 A Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators Tyre age Tyres age and lose their original characteristics even if they are not being used Therefore we recommend not using summer or winter tyres older than 6 or 4 years old respectively New tyres First read and observe the intro
347. used by use are normal CAUTION a Do not use any leather cleaners on Alcantara seat covers a For Alcantara seat covers do not use any solvents floor wax shoe cream stain remover or similar agents a Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order to stop the fabric from bleaching If the vehicle is parked outside for long periods of time cover the fabric to protect it from direct sunlight a Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when used correctly This applies particularly to light coloured seat covers This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Seat covers First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 157 Electrically heated seats Do not clean the covers by moistening as this can damage the seat heating sys tem Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers Seats without seat heating Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use can be removed by brush ing against the direction of hair with a damp brush Always clean all parts of the covers so t
348. uses or influences e g accidents hail flooding etc gt Parts fitted on or in the vehicle whose use has not been approved by SKODA AUTO a s or modification of the vehicle in a manner not approved by KODA AUTO a s e g tuning gt Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist garage or was not rectified properly It is the customer s responsibility to prove that it was not the cause This SKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser s statutory rights from mate rials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims from prod uct liability laws Materials defect liability and SKODA warranty for new cars 5 Mobility warranty The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your vehicle As part of the mobility warranty if your car breaks down when you are on the move as a result of an unexpected fault you can access services to ensure your continued mobility These services include the following Breakdown service at the breakdown location and towing to the SKODA Service Partner technical as sistance by phone or on site operation If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day the KODA Service Partner may provide further services as required such as replacement transportation bus train etc or a courtesy vehicle etc More information regarding terms and conditions for the provision of a mobility warranty for your vehicle can be obtained from your
349. usted at a specialist ga rage 110 Driving CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic Stability Control ESC 111 Antilock Braking System ABS 112 Traction Control System TCS 112 Electronic Differential Lock EDL 112 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA 112 Hill Hold Control HHC 112 EJ warnine A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down The brake assist systems would then fail to function risk of accident Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety provided by the brake assist systems must not tempt you to take safety risks risk of accident a In the event of an ABS fault visit a specialist garage immediately Adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know the exact extent of the damage or the extent to which this is limiting the braking efficiency l CAUTION a All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufactur er to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly Changes to the vehicle e g to the engine brakes chassis can influence the functionality of the brake assist systems page 149 a f a fault occurs in the ABS system the ESC ASR and EDL will also not work An ABS fault is indicated by the warning light page 18 Electronic Stability Control
350. vals Unlocking and opening 33 Switch off display The indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds EI WARNING If the car is locked and the safe securing system activated no people must re main in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or open a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk to life i Note This function only applies to certain countries Individual settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 31 Opening a single door This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The other doors remain locked and are only unlocked when the command is repeated Automatic locking unlocking All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km h The button in the handle of the boot lid is deactivated If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again In addition it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by press ing the central locking button 6 The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened at any time by pulling once on the door opening lever Individual settings can be carried out in a specialist workshop 34 Using the system Locking unlocking the vehicle from the inside Fig 14 Central locking
351. vehicles with diesel particle filters which can put greater strain on the engine oil These difficult conditions are gt Fuel with sulphur content gt Frequent short trips gt Longer periods of engine idling e g taxis gt Operation in areas with heavy dust pollution gt Frequent trailer operation gt Predominantly stop and go traffic as is often the case in city driving for exam ple gt Operation predominantly during winter A service consultant at the specialist garage will tell you whether the operating conditions of your vehicle may make it necessary for service work to be carried out between the normal service intervals Different service charges may apply from the particular scope of work required depending on the vehicle type and equipment and the status of your vehicle i Note The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including changing or replenishing the oil even during the warranty period unless stated otherwise in the KODA AUTO a s warranty terms or other agreements a You will be informed about the current service scopes for the particular service work by the specialist garage Overview of service intervals Fig 129 Vehicle data sticker Service in terval XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXX XXX KXK XX XXX XXXX XXKX AX XKXX XXKX 1D0 SRG KS 1AC 3FA 1ND AL ARS 30T 4X0 8L3 QIi 8GU KH SRE 8YF 8X0 4Fi QNO 9P0 7X0 92ZF 7A0 3GN 602 7P4 FOA 354 2UA Co
352. ventilation cooling Heating Air conditioning system manual air conditioning system Climatronic automatic air conditioning system Universal telephone installation GSM II Voice control Multimedia Driving Steering Starting and stopping the engine Brakes Manual gear changing and pedals Automatic transmission Running in Economical driving and environmental sustainability Avoiding damage to your vehicle Driving abroad Brake assist systems Parking aid 52 52 54 56 64 70 74 76 76 77 79 82 85 85 90 92 96 96 97 99 101 101 104 105 109 T10 11 11 113 Cruise Control System START STOP Towing a trailer Towing device Trailer Safety Passive Safety General information Correct seated position Seat belts Using seat belts Inertia reels and belt tensioners Airbag system Description of the airbag system Airbag overview Deactivating airbags Transporting children safely Child seat Fastening systems General Maintenance Vehicle care Service intervals Service work adjustments and technical alterations Washing your car Taking care of your vehicle exterior Taking care of the interior Inspecting and replenishing Fuel Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Table of Contents 114 T16 119 T19 123
353. ver and is then opened from the outside Unlocking the tailgate Fig 161 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid BNH 0168 AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 194 Unlocking gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 55 gt Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as it goes Fig 161 gt Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow gt Open the boot lid Selector lever emergency unlocking Selector lever emergency un locking Coy First read and observe the introductory information given on page 194 gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Carefully pull up the front left and right cover gt Pull up rear cover gt Press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow Fig 162 using your finger gt At the same time press the locking button in the selector lever and move the selector lever to position N If the selector lever is moved again to position P it is once again blocked CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Replacing the front windscreen wiper blades 195 Replacing the rear window glass wiper blades 196 FJ warnine Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons These can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Replacing the front windscreen wiper blades Fig 163 Windscreen wiper blade F BNH 0254 First read and observe the intro
354. versely affect the handling of your vehicle damage the tyres and are rap idly destroyed Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains Wheels 181 Do it yourself CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects First aid kit and warning triangle CB fire extinguisher 183 Vehicle tool kit 183 First aid kit and warning triangle BNH 0201 Fig 146 Placing of the first aid kit Rapid Rapid Spaceback 182 Do it yourself BNH 0203 Fig 147 Placing of the warning triangle Rapid Rapid Spaceback Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 182 First aid box The first aid box can be fastened to the right hand side of the boot Fig 146 A or the left hand side of the boot Fig 146 Blusing a tensioning strap Warning triangle The warning triangle can be attached to the casing of the rear panel using rubber bands Fig 147 C or inserted into the casing of the rear wall and secured with a rubber band Fig 147 D FI warnine The first aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants i Note Pay attention to the expiration date of the first aid kit We recommend using a first aid kit from SKODA Original Accessor
355. vi sions Child seats complying with the ECE R 44 standard must be used ECE R stands for Economic Commission for Europe Regulation Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard are identified with a test mark that cannot be removed a large E within a circle with the test number be low EE WARNING a The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle Certain outside climatic con ditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle a The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey Other wise the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci dent causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants 142 Safety seat on the front passenger seat Further information page 143 Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat CAUTION When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward adjust the head re straints so that they are as high as possible i Note We recommend that you use child seats from SKODA Original Accessories These child seats were developed and also tested for use in SKODA vehicles They meet the ECE R 44 standard Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Never use a backwards facing child restraint system on a seat that is protected by an active airbag installed in front o
356. ways ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder on no account across your neck a A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then sud denly held firm by the belt The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects e g specta cles ball point pens bunches of keys etc Such objects can cause injury FI WARNING Observe the following instructions for handling the seat belts The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twisted or chafe against any sharp edges Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it EJ WARNING Observe the following instructions for the proper use of the seat belts a Never use one seat belt to secure two persons including children The seatbelt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another passenger a The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to pro tect and the risk of injury increases The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked otherwise the belt tongue w
357. with a panorama roof Fig 28 Rear interior lighting BNH 0238 The light can be operated by moving the lens into one of the following posi tions Fig 28 a switching on 0 switching off Operation using the door contact switch middle position E This chapter contains information on the following subjects Rear window heater 47 Sun visors 47 sunshade Rapid Spaceback 48m Fle AS Dash panel Button for rear win dow heater Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 46 Explanation of graphic Fig 29 a Switch the rear window heater on off When the heater is switched on a lamp lights up inside the button The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running The rear window heater switches off automatically after approx 7 minutes SA For the sake of the environment The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de iced or free from mist The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel econ omy page 108 Saving electrical energy pi Note a f the on board voltage drops the rear window heater switches off automatical ly in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine con trol page 174 Automatic load deactivation a f the light is flashing inside the button the heater is off due to low battery Fig 30 Sun visor left right Co First read and observe the introductory information given
358. y can only be withdrawn if the se lector lever is in the position P Modes and use of selector lever 14 18 D4 o0 22 0 kmh trip 1255 10 2 Fig 93 Selector lever display 102 Driving Fig 94 Shiftlock button BNH 0207 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 101 When the ignition is switched on the gearbox mode and the currently selected gear are indicated in the display Fig 93 The following modes can be selected with the selector lever Fig 93 P Parking mode The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode Parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary R Reverse gear Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idling speed Before moving into mode R from mode P or N depress the brake pedal while si multaneously pressing the lock button Fig 94 N Neutral The power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode D Mode for forwards travel normal programme In mode D the forward gears are automatically changed according to the engine load accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed S Mode for forwards travel sports programme In mode S the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher en gine speeds than in mode D Before changing to mode S from mode D press the lock button Fig 94 Releasing selector lever f

&Scaron;KODA Rapid Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents